GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide - Portland State Universityweb.pdx.edu/~emch/gps/Geo3.pdf ·...
Transcript of GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide - Portland State Universityweb.pdx.edu/~emch/gps/Geo3.pdf ·...
eration GuideMore...
ration Guideration Guideration Guideration Guide
to hide the Contents ofthe GeoExplorer 3Operation Guide.
ards after retracing your steps,retrace your steps.
he documentation.
xplorer 3 Operation Guide.
peration Guide (this page).
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Using the GeoExplorer 3 Op
Using the GeoExplorer 3 OpeUsing the GeoExplorer 3 OpeUsing the GeoExplorer 3 OpeUsing the GeoExplorer 3 Ope
Click to view the Contents of Clickthe GeoExplorer 3Operation Guide.
Click PgUp to go up a page, Fwd to go forwPgDn to go down a page, and Back to
Click to go to the first page of the Index in t
Click to print a page (or pages) of the GeoE
Click to return to Using the GeoExplorer 3 O
Click to close the documentation.
eration Guide
u type in a software screen or
GeoExplorer 3 keypad.
d on the GeoExplorer 3 screen.
current topic. Click the PgDnmove to the remaining
llow a link: Position theer over green or red text.anges to
the mouse to go to the pageining the highlighted topic.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Using the GeoExplorer 3 Op
FontsThis font and color represents information that yowindow.
d is an example of a hardware key that you press on the
This font and color represents messages displaye
indicates more information about thebutton at the bottom of the screen toinformation.
green text indicates a link to a relatedtopic.
To fopointIt ch
Clickconta
red text indicates a link to theglossary.
More...
eration Guide
s, and Tipsformation and indicate its nature
ury or unrecoverable data loss.
mage or software error.
ject to increase your knowledge
can help you make better use of
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Using the GeoExplorer 3 Op
Warnings, Cautions, NoteWarnings, cautions, notes, and tips draw attention to important inand purpose.
WARNING Warnings alert you to situations that could cause personal inj
CAUTION Cautions alert you to situations that could cause hardware da
NOTE Notes give additional significant information about the subor guide your actions.
TIP Tips indicate a shortcut or other time- or labor-saving hint thatthe product.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide System overview 4
I: I: I: I: SYSTEM OVERVIEWSYSTEM OVERVIEWSYSTEM OVERVIEWSYSTEM OVERVIEWThis System Overview provides general information about the GeoExplorer 3® data collectionsystem, its components, and accessories. System Overview is divided into two sections. TheIntroduction explains what the GeoExplorer 3 is and provides an overview of what you can dowith it. Components and Accessories outlines the parts and software that make up theGeoExplorer 3 data collection system.
• Introduction
• Components & accessories
5
system. The topics covered
system?
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide System overview1: Introduction
1111 IntroductionIntroductionIntroductionIntroductionThis section introduces you to the GeoExplorer 3 data collectioninclude:
• What is the GeoExplorer 3 data collection system?
• What can you do with the GeoExplorer 3 data collection
• GeoExplorer 3c edition
• Using the GeoExplorer 3 data collection system
6
3 data
receiver and data collector fore used with a real-time source of™) receiver. It also works with
transfer, data dictionary creation,
rover receiver or as a baserier phase measurements. Usingystem status and satellite
the field. It has an internall GPS receiver. Optionalavailable.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide System overview1: Introduction
What is the GeoExplorercollection system?The GeoExplorer 3 data collection system is an integrated GPSmapping, relocating, and updating GIS and spatial data. It can bdifferential corrections such as Trimble’s Beacon-on-a-Belt (BoBthe GPS Pathfinder® Office software for mission planning, datadata import/export, and postprocessing.
You can operate the GeoExplorer 3 data collection system as astation. You can also collect high-precision data using GPS carthe intuitive user interface you can navigate, collect data, view savailability, and control the GPS receiver.
The GeoExplorer 3 datalogger is designed for handheld use inantenna and power source, and a high-performance 12-channeaccessories, such as external antennas or power kits, are also
7
ction
em are collecting geographice field.
ttributes and GPS position ofone or more data files that youtprocessing and editing. Data
ats.
AD database. You can alsotures.
, or chart—to navigate to specificavigation and provide in-field
ions in the office with the GPSdata collection system to create
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide System overview1: Introduction
What can you do with theGeoExplorer 3 data collesystem?The primary functions of the GeoExplorer 3 data collection systdata, using and updating existing GIS data, and navigating in th
Use the GeoExplorer 3 to accurately and efficiently collect the ageographic points, lines, and areas. This information is stored incan transfer to Trimble’s GPS Pathfinder Office software for poscan then be exported into a wide range of GIS-compatible form
Use the GeoExplorer 3 to update data from an existing GIS or Creview, edit, and update the GPS positions and attributes for fea
Use one of three methods of navigation—a road view, compasslocations. You can use real-time differential GPS to optimize ndifferential accuracy.
It is easy to create or edit data dictionaries and setup configuratPathfinder Office software. Alternatively, use the GeoExplorer 3or edit data dictionaries.
8
r use in the field:
d waypoints
ct positions as you collect data inle with the Beacon-on-a-BeltS providers. To computeOffice software, collect carrier
temporary GPS base station innent base station.
vironmental and resourcen asset management. Forts power poles, record theirare. A maintenance crew canthat need repair.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide System overview1: Introduction
The GeoExplorer 3 data collection system provides two maps fo
• The Chart to create waypoints and to navigate to features an
• The Map to view and update features
For greater precision, use real-time DGPS to differentially correthe field. The GeoExplorer 3 data collection system is compatib(BoB) receiver to provide real-time DGPS, as well as other DGPpositions with even greater accuracy, using the GPS Pathfinderphase data for points, lines, and areas.
You can operate the GeoExplorer 3 data collection system as asituations where it is impossible or impractical to set up a perma
Applications for the GeoExplorer 3 include forestry mapping, enmanagement, disaster assessment, utility inventories, and urbaexample, a power company could build an asset register of all ipositions, their condition and structure, and any attached hardwthen use the GeoExplorer 3 navigation functions to locate poles
9
.
m edition, the following
collection system
ce software
lorer 3 data collection system. To
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide System overview1: Introduction
GeoExplorer 3c editionThis manual describes the GeoExplorer 3 data collection system
If you have purchased the GeoExplorer 3c data collection systefunctionality is not available with your system:
• Map or Chart tabs
• Cable-free communication with the BoB receiver
• Transfer of Trimble SSF data files to the GeoExplorer 3 data
• Transfer of coordinate systems from the GPS Pathfinder Offi
You can upgrade your GeoExplorer 3c edition to the full GeoExpdo this, contact your local Trimble dealer.
10
data
are:
and how to use the keys and
• The NAV section
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide System overview1: Introduction
Using the GeoExplorer 3collection systemThe GeoExplorer 3 firmware is arranged in three sections. They
General operation explains the structure of the three sectionsscreens.
Alternatively, refer to your QuickStart quick reference card.
• The SYS section • The DATA section
11
cessoriescessoriescessoriescessoriesponents:
owing optional accessories:
cting the system.
em cable
lorer 3 external power kit
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide System overview2: Components & accessories
2222 Components Components Components Components & a& a& a& accccThe GeoExplorer 3 data collection system has the following com
• The GeoExplorer 3 handheld data collector
• GeoExplorer 3 support module
• GPS Pathfinder Office software
• GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide CD
• QuickStart
• Standard accessories
The GeoExplorer 3 data collection system also contains the foll
Before you unpack the components and accessories, see Inspe
• Data collector pouch • Lanyard
• Serial clip • Null mod
• Beacon-on-a-Belt (BoB) receiver • GeoExp
• External antenna option
12
nspect all contents for visibleged, notify the carrier. Keep the
Trimble. Extra components can
g with instructions for returning
uipment listal power kital antenna kitB) receiver equipment listB) receiver external power kit
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide System overview2: Components & accessories
Inspecting the systemWhen you receive your GeoExplorer 3 data collection system, idamage (scratches, dents) and if any instruments appear damashipping and packaging material for the carrier’s inspection.
You will need to provide a part number to return a component tobe also be ordered.
All components and part numbers are listed in this manual, alongoods to Trimble.
If you have purchased the … see …GeoExplorer 3 data collection system GeoExplorer 3 full eqGeoExplorer 3 external power kit GeoExplorer 3 externGeoExplorer 3 external antenna kit GeoExplorer 3 externBeacon-on-a-Belt system Beacon-on-a-Belt (BoBeacon-on-a-Belt (BoB) externalpower kit
Beacon-on-a-Belt (Bo
13
listber for each item included witheful for ordering spare or
Part Number39100-00-ENG38376-0038599185323699638595-0038604-0038598-00-ENG38596-20-ENG38597-20-ENG25110-0039180
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide System overview2: Components & accessories
GeoExplorer 3 full equipmentThe following table lists the product name and Trimble part numthe GeoExplorer 3 data collection system. This information is usreplacement parts:
Equipment descriptionGeoExplorer 3 data collection system
GeoExplorer 3 data collectorGeoExplorer 3 data collector pouchNull modem cableGeoExplorer 3 data collector lanyardGeoExplorer 3 serial clipGeoExplorer 3 support moduleGeoExplorer 3 QuickStartGeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide CDGeoExplorer 3 Release NotesWarranty Activation CardWall power cable
14
pment list
3887434191-28-ENG24177-0134191-2834195-28-ENG34231-28-ENG34192-28-ENG3914239292-00
) 39628-20-ENG
Part Number39100-50-ENG
stem but with different
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide System overview2: Components & accessories
GeoExplorer 3c edition equi
Power supplyGPS Pathfinder Office software system
Mapping Systems General ReferenceGPS Pathfinder Office v2.80 software CDGPS Pathfinder Office v2.80 Release NotesGPS Pathfinder Office v2.80 Getting Started GuideGPS Pathfinder Office manual set (optional)
GeoExplorer 3 RTCM/NMEA splitter cable (optional)GeoExplorer 3 hard carrying case (optional)GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide (optional printed manual
Equipment descriptionGeoExplorer 3c data collection system
(this is the same as the GeoExplorer 3 data collection syfirmware)
15
kitber for each item included withor ordering spare or replacement
Part Number39001-0021754-1017466185323918339182391813918411017
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide System overview2: Components & accessories
GeoExplorer 3 external powerThe following table lists the product name and Trimble part numthe GeoExplorer 3 external power kit. This information is useful fparts:
Equipment descriptionGeoExplorer 3 External Power Kit
Shoulder carrying pouch12 V camcorder batteryNull modem cableExternal power splitter cableVehicle adaptor power cableCamcorder adaptor power cableCamcorder chargerCamcorder charger cable
16
a kiter of the GeoExplorer 3 externalcement parts:
Part Number39002-00
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide System overview2: Components & accessories
GeoExplorer 3 external antennThe following table lists the product name and Trimble part numbantenna kit. This information is useful for ordering spare or repla
Equipment descriptionGeoExplorer 3 External Antenna Kit
17
er equipment
ber for each item included withers outside the United Statesis useful for ordering spare or
Part Number(United States only)38600-00-ENG38508-0038603388743918025110-0038601-0038602-00-ENG43377
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide System overview2: Components & accessories
Beacon-on-a-Belt (BoB) receivlistThe following table lists the product name and Trimble part numthe Beacon-on-a-Belt (BoB) system in the United States (customshould refer to the table on the following page). This informationreplacement parts:
Equipment description
Beacon-on-a-Belt (BoB) systemBoB receiverBoB receiver pouchWall power cablePower supplyWarranty Activation CardPC-BoB softwareBoB Receiver ManualNull modem cable
18
ber for each item included withUnited States. This information
Part Number (outsidethe United States)38600-10-ENG38508-1038603388743918025110-0038601-0038602-00-ENG43377
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide System overview2: Components & accessories
The following table lists the product name and Trimble part numthe Beacon-on-a-Belt (BoB) system for customers outside theis useful for ordering spare or replacement parts:
Equipment description
Beacon-on-a-Belt (BoB) systemBoB receiverBoB receiver pouchWall power cablePower supplyWarranty Activation CardPC-BoB softwareBoB Receiver ManualNull modem cable
19
er external
ber for each item included withis useful for ordering spare or
Part Number39003-00174663918139182391843887421756
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide System overview2: Components & accessories
Beacon-on-a-Belt (BoB) receivpower kitThe following table lists the product name and Trimble part numthe Beacon-on-a-Belt (BoB) external power kit. This informationreplacement parts:
Equipment descriptionBeacon-on-a-Belt (BoB) External power kit
12 V Camcorder batteryCamcorder adaptor cableVehicle adaptor cable12 V Camcorder chargerWall power cableVehicle splitter cable
20
eld data
ce 12-channel GPS receiver. It isoExplorer 3 you can navigate toute information for point, line,
GeoExplorer 3lector:
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide System overview2: Components & accessories
The GeoExplorer 3 handhcollectorThe GeoExplorer 3 handheld data collector is a high performana battery-powered unit designed for use in the field. With the Gepoints of interest and also store up to 1 MB of position and attriband area features.
Maintenance and care of yourTo maintain and care for your GeoExplorer 3 handheld data col
• keep the outer surface free of dirt and dust
• keep the connectors free of dirt and dust
• recharge the internal battery when required
21
oduleeen the GeoExplorer 3 and the
support module when theupport module automaticallyin Standby mode.
OTE For pinout details,see Specifications.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide System overview2: Components & accessories
GeoExplorer 3 support mThe GeoExplorer 3 support module is used to transfer data betwPC software and also charge the internal battery.
You can put the GeoExplorer 3 handheld into the GeoExplorer 3GeoExplorer 3 is on or off. When powered, the GeoExplorer 3 sdetects that the GeoExplorer 3 is present and, if it is off, puts it
t
N
22
ftwareows 95, Windows 98, Windows
need to manage a datag and GIS data collection
ful Quick Plan Mission Planning
ated with these projects
trol the data collection operationurate, and compatible with your
ollectors.
ing this data onto a vector or
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide System overview2: Components & accessories
GPS Pathfinder Office soThe GPS Pathfinder Office software runs under Microsoft Wind2000, Windows ME, or Windows NT. It provides all the tools youcollection project, handling data from the entire range of Mappinsystems that use Trimble GPS receivers.
The GPS Pathfinder Office software lets you:
• plan the best times to collect GPS positions, using the powerutility.
• create separate projects to help you manage the data associeffectively and conveniently.
• construct and edit data dictionaries, which can be used to conand which make sure that the collected data is complete, accGIS, CAD package, or database.
• transfer files to and from GPS receivers and handheld data c
• process the GPS positional data to improve its accuracy.
• display and edit collected data in the office, optionally overlayraster background map.
23
D, or database format.
der Office software to make bestsoftware is used to transfer GPSata. The GPS Pathfinder Officeor CAD system.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide System overview2: Components & accessories
• export the collected, processed, and edited data to a GIS, CA
• produce a scaled plot as a paper record of the data.
• set up configurations for your GeoExplorer 3 data collector.
The GeoExplorer 3 data collection system uses the GPS Pathfinuse of the data collected in the field. The GPS Pathfinder Officedata to a PC, and then differentially correct, view, and edit the dsoftware also exports the data in a format suitable for your GIS
24
Guide CDGeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide System overview2: Components & accessories
GeoExplorer 3 OperationThe standard GeoExplorer 3 data collection system includes theCD.
The CD is designed to provide you withhands-on learning that is easy andinformative.
It contains:
• an interactive tutorial
• a documentation tutorial
• a GeoExplorer 3 reference guidedetailing every system function
25
to be taken into the field.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide System overview2: Components & accessories
QuickStartThe GeoExplorer 3 QuickStart quick reference card is designed
It contains information about:
• the GeoExplorer 3 handheld
• the menu structure
• status bar icons
• satellite information
• basic troubleshooting
26
ed as part of your GeoExplorer 3
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide System overview2: Components & accessories
Standard accessoriesThe following sections describe the standard accessories providdata collection system.
• Data collector pouch
• Lanyard
• Serial clip
• Null modem cable
27
r 3 handheld data collector anduch fits ergonomically onto your
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide System overview2: Components & accessories
Data collector pouchThe data collector pouch is provided to protect your GeoExploreenable you to store and transport it easily. The data collector pobelt as shown:
t
28
tor or to the data collector pouchrer 3 as shown:
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide System overview2: Components & accessories
LanyardThe lanyard can be attached to your GeoExplorer 3 data collecto make it easier to carry. Connect the lanyard to the GeoExplo
29
xplorer 3 data collector to let youto connect to a device that
ou can also use the serial clip toternal power source.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide System overview2: Components & accessories
Serial clipThe serial clip is attached to the swipes on the rear of the GeoEconnect to an RTCM device to receive real-time corrections, orreceives NMEA data.
If you do not have a GeoExplorer 3 support module available, yconnect to either your office computer to transfer data, or an ex
NOTE For pinout details, see Specifications.
t
30
oExplorer 3 support module to
lorer 3 data collector to the officeer, where the cable-freerence.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide System overview2: Components & accessories
Null modem cableThe supplied DB-9 null modem cable is used to connect the Gethe office computer.
The null modem cable can also be used to connect the GeoExpcomputer using the serial clip, and to connect to the BoB receivtransmission is either not enabled, or not possible due to interfe
31
ccessoriessystem are:
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide System overview2: Components & accessories
GeoExplorer 3 optional aThe optional accessories for the GeoExplorer 3 data collection
• Beacon-on-a-Belt (BoB) receiver
• GeoExplorer 3 external power kit
• External antenna option (vehicle and range pole mount)
32
erceiving differential correctionsrmat. The BoB receivera standard RS-232 connection.
oB receiver.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide System overview2: Components & accessories
Beacon-on-a-Belt (BoB) receivThe BoB receiver is a belt-mounted MSK receiver capable of refrom DGPS radiobeacons using the RTCM SC-104 standard foretransmits this data both on a low power cable-free link and on
Configure the BoB receiver using the PC-BoB software for the B
33
kita factory-installed Lithium-ion0 hours before needing to be
fe you can purchase the externala rechargeable 12 V camcorder
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide System overview2: Components & accessories
GeoExplorer 3 external powerThe standard GeoExplorer 3 data collection system comes withbattery. This will provide power for the GeoExplorer 3 for up to 1recharged (less if the backlight is used). For additional battery lipower kit. This lets you power the GeoExplorer 3 receiver frombattery, or from a vehicle. The kit includes:
• Shoulder carrying pouch
• 12 V camcorder battery and charger
• Vehicle power adaptor cable
• Camcorder power adaptor cable
• Power/data splitter cable
34
r 3 handheld data collector,
T
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide System overview2: Components & accessories
Shoulder carrying pouchThe shoulder carrying pouch can accommodate the GeoExplorea 12 V camcorder battery, and cable accessories:
T
35
able 12 V camcorder batteryours of continuous3 operation, and can be fullyrnight.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide System overview2: Components & accessories
12 V camcorder battery and chargerThe rechargeprovides 20 hGeoExplorerrecharged ove
36
er cable or the support module to
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide System overview2: Components & accessories
Vehicle power adaptor cableThe vehicle power adaptor cable connects the power/data splitta vehicle’s cigarette-lighter socket.
37
plitter cable or the support
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide System overview2: Components & accessories
Camcorder power adaptor cableThe camcorder power adaptor cable connects the power/data smodule to the camcorder battery.
rr
38
ed through the serial clip while
To serial clip
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide System overview2: Components & accessories
Power/data splitter cableThe power/data splitter cable allows external power to be receivalso allowing a serial connection to the GeoExplorer 3 receiver.
To other device
To vehicle orcamcorder adaptor
39
SLIDE
ANTENNA
TO REMOVE
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide System overview2: Components & accessories
External antenna optionIn situations where the internal antenna’s view of thesky is blocked (for example, in a vehicle), or inmultipath conditions, an optional external antenna kitis available. The external antenna kit contains anantenna with a magnetic base and a pole-mountableground plane. Poles are purchased separately.
40
asks that you will perform whenary functions of thearts to the tutorial, three relate to
eed with this tutorial. You needcollection system and how to
for update
e field
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide TutorialIntroduction
II: TUTORIALII: TUTORIALII: TUTORIALII: TUTORIALThe Tutorial provides step-by-step instructions for some of the tusing the GeoExplorer 3 data collection system. Two of the primGeoExplorer 3 are data collection and data update. Of the five pdata collection and two to real-time data update. They are:
NOTE It is important that you read the Introduction before you procto know about the menu structure of the GeoExplorer 3 datause the keypad on the GeoExplorer 3 handheld.
Data Collection Data Update
• In the office • Preparing
• In the field • Back in th
• Processing the data
41
utorial is based on the following
s and resources. These includecets, lakes, and other resourcesindicating its condition and otherre responsible for collecting new
or Waterstone Park. Then youinder Office software. When then system, you go out to the parkou postprocess the data totional Park GIS.
data using the GeoExplorer 3fer existing data to theou use the GeoExplorer 3 dataerential GPS source to navigate
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide TutorialIntroduction
To help you master the main concepts and tasks involved, the tscenario:
The Waterstone National Park requires an inventory of its assetgates, roads, signs, campgrounds and their amenities, water fauin the park. Information needs to be collected about each entity,specific information. As a Park Ranger, you and your field crew adata, as well as updating the existing GIS data.
Data collection: In this part of the tutorial you create a project fcreate a data dictionary, or list of features, using the GPS Pathfdata dictionary is transferred to the GeoExplorer 3 data collectioand use it to record features and attributes. Back in the office, yachieve better results and export the data to the Waterstone Na
Data update: In this part of the tutorial you update existing GISdata collection system. Before going back to the park you transGeoExplorer 3 and prepare for an update session. In the field, ycollection system and the Beacon-on-a-Belt (BoB) real-time diffback to features and then update the attributes.
42
eate a project and a datae GeoExplorer 3 data collection
lp you prepare to go out to the
e software
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial3: In the office
3333 In the officeIn the officeIn the officeIn the officeBefore going to Waterstone Park to collect data, you need to crdictionary. When the data dictionary is complete, transfer it to thsystem.
Preparing for collection provides step-by-step instructions to hefield and collect data. Topics are:
• Creating a project
• Creating a data dictionary using the GPS Pathfinder Offic
• Data transfer
• Checking the equipment
43
sed tool for processing andyour data collection session and
rojects. Dividing the work in thisul names, and assign separate
mple, you could create a projectpark, or for each month.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial3: In the office
Creating a projectThe GPS Pathfinder Office software is a powerful, Windows-bamanaging GPS data. GPS Pathfinder Office lets you easily planprocess the GPS data successfully.
Use the GPS Pathfinder Office software to organize work into pway helps you manage files. You can give all projects meaningffolders for base, export, and backup files.
You can also set up projects for different groups of data. For exafor each major monitoring task, as well as for each region of the
For this tutorial, create a project named Geo3 Tutorial.
For more information, refer to the GPS Pathfinder Office Help.
44
y using theftware
butes relevant to a particularfeature and its attributes.
ortant. Design a data dictionaryicular, be familiar with any formatto import the data you collect.
reate a data dictionary to collect
es. These include gates, roads,you record for each type ofcondition of a gate are attributes.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial3: In the office
Creating a data dictionarGPS Pathfinder Office soA data dictionary contains a description of the features and attriproject or job. It is used in the field to control the collection of a
Understanding how to put together a data dictionary is very impwith your Geographic Information System (GIS) in mind. In partrestrictions imposed by the GIS, otherwise you may not be able
The Waterstone National Park already has a GIS. You need to cnew data, and update existing data, for import to the GIS.
The different park components that you need to map are featurwater faucets, and lakes. The different types of information thatfeature are attributes. For example, the name of a road, or the
45
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial3: In the officeIn this part of the tutorial the following tasks are explained:
• Starting a data dictionary
• Creating a point feature
• Creating a menu attribute
• Creating a numeric attribute
• Creating a line feature
• Creating a text attribute
• Creating a menu attribute with a default value
• Creating an area feature
• Creating a point feature with a date attribute
• Creating the numeric attributes
• Creating a date attribute
• Saving the data dictionary
46
fice software, select Utilities /
the data dictionary that appears
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial3: In the office
Starting a data dictionary1. To start the Data Dictionary Editor in the GPS Pathfinder Of
Data Dictionary Editor.
2. In the Name field, type Waterstone. This is the title ofon the GeoExplorer 3 handheld.
47
good reference. The dialog box
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial3: In the office
3. In the Comment field, type your name. This is optional, but alooks similar to the following:
48
be used to do an inventory of
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial3: In the office
Creating a point feature
The first type of feature you are going to create is a gate. It willwhere all the gates are and what condition they are in.
To create a pointfeature:
1. Click New Feature.Make sure that theProperties tab isselected.
2. In the FeatureName field, typeGate.
This is the namethat appears on theGeoExplorer 3handheld when youuse this datadictionary in thefield.
49
efault. A gate is at a singlepriate classification for this
of features. A symbol indicates
here are two attributes for thettribute).
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial3: In the office
3. In the Feature Classification group, the Point option is the dlocation on the earth’s surface, so a point is the most approfeature. Leave this setting as is.
4. Click OK.
The Data Dictionary Editor screen displays “Gate” in the listthat it is a point feature.
First create the gate point feature and then add the attributes. Tgate feature: Condition (menu attribute) and Lock ID (numeric a
• Creating a menu attribute
• Creating a numeric attribute
50
re is a defined set of options.to enter values in the field and to
is attribute are good, repair, orld, a menu with these three
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial3: In the office
Creating a menu attribute
Menu attributes are useful when the information you need to stoThis standardizes the entry of information and makes it quickersearch for features in the GPS Pathfinder Office software.
The first attribute of the gate is Condition. The only values for threpaint, so making this a menu attribute is appropriate. In the fievalues appears when you are entering the Condition attribute.
To create a menu attribute:
1. Click New Attribute. The following dialog appears:
2. Select the Menu option and click Add.
The New Menu Attribute dialog appears.
51
ute Name field, type
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial3: In the office
3. You need to know the condition of the gates, so in the AttribCondition:
52
ears.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial3: In the office
4. Click New. The New Attribute Value – Menu Item dialog app
5. In the Attribute Value field, type Good. Click Add.
6. In the Attribute Value field type Repair. Click Add.
7. In the Attribute Value field type Repaint. Click Add.
53
splays the new attribute values:
he New Attribute Type dialog.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial3: In the office
8. Click Close to return to the New Menu Attribute dialog. It di
9. Click OK to create this attribute. Then click Close to close t
54
he minimum and maximumlue can save time.
lock ID number identifies whichmber between 1 and 200.
ic Default Values Requirednumeric attributes without
meric Default Values Required.e information, refer to the GPS
and click OK.
this default value, as the lock ID
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial3: In the office
Creating a numeric attribute
Use a numeric attribute type to enter numeric values in fields. Tvalues help eliminate incorrect entries, and a sensible default va
The next attribute you need to create for the gate is Lock ID. Akey corresponds to which lock in the park. It is recorded as a nu
NOTE Before creating this numeric attribute, make sure the Numercommand is turned off. This is necessary if you are to createdefault values. To turn off this command, select Options / NuThere must be no check mark beside the command. For morPathfinder Office Help.
To create a numeric attribute:
1. In the New Attribute Type dialog, select the Numeric option
2. In the Attribute Name field, type Lock ID.
3. In the Decimal Places field, the default is 0. Do not changenumbers do not have any decimal places.
55
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial3: In the office4. In the Minimum field type 1and in the Maximum fieldtype 200, as all lock IDnumbers are between 1and 200. This limits therange of values that youcan enter:
5. Click OK to create thisattribute.
6. Click Close to close theNew Attribute Type dialog.The attributes you creatednow appear in the attributefield.
NOTE When you are in the field, ifyou enter a value outside theminimum/maximum range, anerror message appears on thescreen of the GeoExplorer 3handheld.
56
r this feature.
ns. The default logging intervalrt logging a line feature, the
ntil you end the feature logging.e. An increased logging ratemap of the roads is provided.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial3: In the office
Creating a line feature
You need to map the roads in the park, so create a line feature.
To create a line feature:
1. Click New Feature.
The New Feature dialog appears.
2. In the Feature Name field, type Road.
3. In the Feature Classification group, select Line.
4. Select the Default Settings tab to view the logging interval fo
The logging interval is the time between feature GPS positiofor line features is 5 seconds. This means that when you staGeoExplorer 3 logs one GPS position every five seconds, uChange the logging interval to 1 second for the Road featurmakes sure that more data is collected and a more detailed
57
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial3: In the office
5. Use the LoggingInterval list boxes tochange the logginginterval to 1 second:
6. Click OK to createthis feature.
NOTE When you are in thefield, you can also usethe GeoExplorer 3 datacollection system toedit the logging intervalin Feature settings.
58
tes. There are two attributes forattribute).
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial3: In the office
Now that you have created the road line feature, add the attributhis feature: Road Name (text attribute) and Speed Limit (menu
• Creating a text attribute
• Creating a menu attribute with a default value
59
es for different occurrences of arial you want to record the nameso a text attribute is appropriate.
d name. To make sure that thethat, in the field, a name must be
an be entered for the attribute.u can change this, but for this
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial3: In the office
Creating a text attribute
Text attributes are useful when the information to be stored varifeature and when a defined menu list is impractical. For this tutoof each road. There are too many road names to make a menu,It lets you enter letters, numbers, and punctuation, for each roaroad name is entered, set the attribute as required. This meansentered before the road feature can be saved.
To create a required text attribute:
1. Click New Attribute.
The New Attribute Type dialog appears.
2. In the Type field, select Text and click Add.
3. In the Attribute Name field, type Name.
4. The Length field determines the number of characters that cBy default, the length of a text attribute is 30 characters. Yotutorial leave as is.
60
eans that the field crew must
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial3: In the office
5. In the On Creation group, select the Required option. This menter a value for the Name attribute:
6. Click OK to create this attribute.
61
e
d the speed limit for each of theo a menu attribute is appropriate.ph, so make 10 the defaulteds to be entered only if it is not
d click Add.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial3: In the office
Creating a menu attribute with a default valu
The next attribute for the road is Speed Limit. You want to recorroads. The values are defined numbers within a certain range, sMost of the roads in Waterstone Park have a speed limit of 10 mvalue. This saves time in the field, as the speed limit attribute ne10 mph.
To create a menu attribute with a default value:
1. In the New Attribute Type dialog, select the Menu option an
The New Menu Attribute dialog appears.
2. In the Attribute Name field, type Speed Limit.
3. Click New.
The New Attribute Value – Menu Item dialog appears.
4. In the Attribute Value field, type 5 and click Add.
62
e default. To do this, select the
r 20 and 25.
o the New Menu Attribute dialog.l appears in front of 10 to show
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial3: In the office
5. In the Attribute Value field, type 10 and set this value as thDefault check box and click Add.
6. In the Attribute Value field type 15 and click Add. Repeat fo
7. When you have entered all the values, click Close to return tIt now displays the attribute values you created. An * symbothat it is the default.
8. Click OK to create this attribute.
9. Click Close to close the New Attribute dialog.
63
re to record the location of watere way that you created the Gate
er (numeric attribute), Test Tube
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial3: In the office
Creating a point feature with a date attribute
The next feature to create is a water faucet. Use this point featufaucets in the park. Create the Water Faucet feature in the samfeature. For more information, see Creating a point feature.
There are three attributes for the Water Faucet feature: ID NumbNumber (numeric attribute), and Date (date attribute).
• Creating the numeric attributes
• Creating a date attribute
64
mber. You will record this number
d the Lock ID attribute. Use the
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial3: In the office
Creating the numeric attributes
All water faucets in the park are labeled with an identification nuwhen collecting data.
Create the ID Number attribute in the same way that you createfollowing values:
65
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial3: In the officeMonthly water samples arecollected from the waterfaucets in the park to makesure water is safe for drinking.The samples are collected inpre-numbered test tubes. Thistest tube number is recorded inthe GeoExplorer 3 so thatresults from the lab can becorrectly entered into the GIS.
Create the Test Tube Numberattribute the same way youcreated the Lock ID attribute.Use the following values:
For more information, see Creating a numeric attribute.
66
. You can create this attribute sofaucet feature is collected, the
click OK.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial3: In the office
Creating a date attribute
The last attribute for the Water Faucet feature is the date visitedthat it is automatically generated for each faucet. When a watercurrent date is automatically entered as the Date attribute.
To create a Date attribute:
1. In the New Attribute Type dialog select the Date option and
2. In the Attribute Name field, type Date.
67
cted. Select the Auto Generate
xisting one, the GeoExplorer 3
e New Attribute Type dialog.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial3: In the office
3. By default, the Auto Generate on Creation check box is seleon Update check box, as well.
When you create a new water faucet feature or update an eautomatically generates the date
4. Click OK to create this attribute, then click Close to close th
68
a feature. You do not need toutes for this feature. Create the, but this time in the New Feature
rtant to save the new data
ta dictionary is automaticallyrstone.ddf.
athfinder Office Help.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial3: In the office
Creating an area feature
You need to map the lakes in Waterstone Park, so create an arerecord any information about the lake, so you do not need attribLake feature in the same way that you created the Gate featuredialog select Area in the Feature Classification group.
For more information, see Creating a point feature.
Saving the data dictionary
Once you have added all features and their attributes, it is impodictionary.
To save the data dictionary:
1. Select File / Save As.
The Save As dialog appears. By default, the name of the daused to generate the file name, for example, C:\Pfdata\Wate
2. Click Save.
3. From the menu bar select File / Exit.
For more information about data dictionaries, refer to the GPS P
69
ld, use the GeoExplorer 3 data, or to add features, attributes,
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial3: In the office
NOTE Create a data dictionary in the office or in the field. In the fiecollection system to create a new customized data dictionaryand values to an existing data dictionary.
For more information, see Data dictionaries.
70
xplorer 3 data collection system,ransfer utility in the GPSe GeoExplorer 3 and the office
uter to the GeoExplorer 3 data
pport module. Make sure that
athfinder Office software. (IfCOMMS form.)
a if the support module is
Transfer.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial3: In the office
Data transferYou need to transfer the Waterstone data dictionary to the GeoEso that you can use it in the field to collect data. Use the Data TPathfinder Office software to efficiently transfer data between thcomputer.
To transfer the Waterstone data dictionary from the office compcollection system:
1. Place the GeoExplorer 3 handheld in the GeoExplorer 3 suthe support module is connected to the office computer.
The GeoExplorer 3 is ready to communicate with the GPS Pcommunication fails to take place, check the settings in the
NOTE You do not have to turn on the GeoExplorer 3 to transfer datpowered.
2. In the GPS Pathfinder Office software, select Utilities / Data
The Data Transfer dialog appears.
71
the GeoExplorer 3 handheld.
er on COM 1 or GIS Dataloggerrt module is connected to) or youandheld.
xplorer 3 handheld.
s. Highlight it and click Open.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial3: In the office
3. From the Device list, select the device name that represents
You can use one of the predefined names (GIS Dataloggon COM 2, depending on which serial (COM) port the suppocan set up a new device definition for your GeoExplorer 3 h
The Data Transfer utility automatically connects to the GeoE
4. Select the Send tab.
5. Click Add and select Data Dictionary from the list.
The Open dialog appears.
6. Browse until the Waterstone.ddf file appears in the list of file
72
onary appears in the Files to
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial3: In the office
The Open dialog disappears, and the Waterstone data dictiSend list:
73
dheld.
r appears. Click Close to close it.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial3: In the office
7. Click Transfer All.
The data dictionary is transferred to the GeoExplorer 3 han
8. A message showing summary information about the transfe
9. To close the Data Transfer utility, click Close.
74
ke sure that you have enoughxplorer 3 handheld is in theby screen to check the internal
ck the level of the internal power..
t it in the support module, the
ou turn off the GeoExplorer 3it in the support module, thescreen appears. Check that
nal power source is fullyand that data is beinged. When the level of thepower is at its highest, thepower icon appears full (black).
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial3: In the office
Checking the equipmentBefore going into the field, check the internal power level to mapower to complete the data collection session. When the GeoEGeoExplorer 3 support module and turned off, use the Standpower level.
TIP When the GeoExplorer 3 is turned on, use the Status bar to cheTo view the percentage of remaining power use The Status tab
NOTE If the GeoExplorer 3 handheld is still turned on when you puStandby screen does not appear. The handheld stays on.
When yand putstandbythe interchargedtransferrinternalinternal
Data transfer iconInternal power icon
75
u are ready to go to Waterstones that you should complete. Datactions required to collect point,
ics include:
u need to know about the mainw to use the keypad on the
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial4: In the field
4444 In the fieldIn the fieldIn the fieldIn the fieldThis part of the tutorial uses the data dictionary just created. YoNational Park and collect features. But first there are some taskcollection explains these tasks and gives the step-by-step instruline, and area features, with a variety of different attributes. Top
• Initial tasks
• Collecting data
• Closing a file
NOTE Read the Introduction before proceeding with this tutorial. Yostructure of the GeoExplorer 3 data collection system and hoGeoExplorer 3 handheld.
76
tasks:
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial4: In the field
Initial tasksBefore starting a data collection session, complete the following
• Turning on the GeoExplorer 3 handheld
• Getting a clear view of the sky
• Checking the GPS status
• Creating a new file
77
handheldrer 3 handheld.
reen appears for a few seconds
isplayed.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial4: In the field
Turning on the GeoExplorer 3When you get to the park, press o to turn on the GeoExplo
When the GeoExplorer 3 is turned on a Trimble identification scwhile a short self-test is performed.
The GPS tab always appears after the identification screen is d
78
where you have a clear view ofeoExplorer 3 handheld with the
u. The internal antenna of thecated above the screen. Theeed to be held perfectly level,na facing upwards, notways.
eived from any direction but ifnna the GeoExplorer 3 will notellites and will stop computingsignals can be blocked byeavy tree cover, large vehicles,
itters. Anything that blocks light. GPS signals can go throughglass, but these all weaken the
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial4: In the field
Getting a clear view of the skyMove to a locationthe sky. Hold the Gscreen towards yoGeoExplorer 3 is loreceiver does not nbut keep the antendownwards or side
Signals can be recyou cover the antelonger track the sapositions. Satellitepeople, buildings, hor powerful transmalso blocks signalsleaves, plastic, andsignal.
79
begins to track visible satellitesck if the GeoExplorer 3 ismetry of the satellites that areout this icon, see Status bar.
se that are being used tohow accurate the GPS positions
n affect your GPS data.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial4: In the field
Checking the GPS statusWhen you turn on the GeoExplorer 3 handheld, it automaticallyand to calculate its current position. Use the satellite icon to checomputing GPS positions. It provides information about the geobeing used to compute GPS positions. For more information ab
Use the GPS tab to view the satellites currently tracked and thocalculate the current position. You can also get an indication ofare.
NOTE For further explanation of satellite geometry, and how this cacollection, refer to the Mapping Systems General Reference
80
en appears:
3 is currently tracking.
sing to compute its current GPSlorer 3 is getting signals from, butample, eight satellites are being
ns.
but that the GeoExplorer 3 is
Satellites being used tocompute positions
Satellite geometry indicator
Current position
Minimum levelSkyplot
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial4: In the field
To view the GPS screen:
1. Presss until the GPS tab is active. The following scre
2. Use the skyplot to check the satellites that the GeoExplorer
Black boxes represent satellites that the GeoExplorer 3 is uposition. Unfilled boxes represent satellites that the GeoExpnot using because the signals are too weak. In the above extracked, and seven are being used to compute GPS positio
NOTE Numbers with no box represent satellites that are available,not receiving signals from.
GPS tab
Signal strengthbar graph
Minimum level
81
). It indicates what direction theay need to calibrate the internal
screen.
signal strength of the satellites. Ifm level, there may be some
e overall quality of the GPSs. When the bar is above thecomputed.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial4: In the field
NOTE The skyplot rotates as you change direction (like a compassGeoExplorer 3 is pointing to. (If the skyplot does not rotate, you mcompass—see Calibration.)
Your current GPS position is displayed at the bottom of the
3. Use the signal strength bar graph (on the left), to check thethe strength of a GPS signal is below the configured minimuobstruction blocking the signal.
4. Use the satellite geometry indicator (on the right), to view thpositions. This is determined by the geometry of the satelliteconfigured minimum level indicator GPS positions are being
For more information, see The GPS tab.
82
te a new file:
ers a name in the File field. Yoututorial leave it as it is.
ary that you created in the office
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial4: In the field
Creating a new fileBefore you can start a data collection session, you need to crea
1. Pressd. The File tab appears:
The GeoExplorer 3 data collection system automatically entcan change the name of the file, but for the purposes of this
2. In the Dictionary field, check that the Waterstone data dictionappears.
83
ed to the GeoExplorer 3
ways associated with that file.dictionary.
file is created and the New
t contains all the features in theyou created in the office.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial4: In the field
NOTE The latest data dictionary file and configuration file transferrautomatically become the defaults.
NOTE The data dictionary you select when creating a data file is alOnce the file is created, it is not possible to change its data
3. All information in the form is correct, so press E. Thefeature list appears:
You are now ready to collect data.
The New feature lisdata dictionary that
84
nd you have created a new file,gives step-by-step instructions
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial4: In the field
Collecting dataThe GeoExplorer 3 data collection system is tracking satellites aso you are ready to start collecting data. This part of the tutorialfor the following tasks:
• Collecting a point feature
• Collecting a line feature using the Later button
• Collecting a point feature using the Later button
• Collecting an area feature
85
is already highlighted in the Newhe GeoExplorer 3 starts logging
e GeoExplorer 3 will record afigured logging interval set whenifferential correction of the
inder Office software) to produce
lorer 3 starts logging GPSg icon appears at the bottom ofnumber above the icon
y positions have been logged fore.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial4: In the field
Collecting a point feature1. The first point feature that you want to collect is a gate. Gate
feature list, so press E . The Gate form appears and tpositions.
You can remain stationary at a point for a period of time. Thnumber of GPS positions during this time, based on the conthe feature was defined in the Data Dictionary Editor. After dpositions, they are averaged together (using the GPS Pathfan accurate position for the point feature.
When the GeoExppositions the logginthe status bar. Theindicates how manthe selected featur
Loggingicon
86
d is already highlighted, so pressta dictionary appears:
highlight Good, then pressattribute in the form.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial4: In the field
2. Enter the Condition attribute for the gate. The Condition fielE . A Pop-up list of values that was defined in the da
3. The condition of the gate looks good. Use the arrow keys toE . The GeoExplorer 3 automatically goes to the next
87
meric attribute, so a
is highlighted. Press1 to scrollleft. Press 1 to scroll the
r the Lock ID.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial4: In the field
4. To enter the Lock ID number press E. Lock ID is a nuNumeric entry field appears:
The number on the lock is 43. By default, the rightmost cellthe displayed number to 3. Press 2 to move one cell to thedisplayed number to 4. Press E to accept the value fo
88
n needed for the gate.
bottom of the screen to confirm
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial4: In the field
You have collected all the positions and attribute informatio
5. To close the gate feature press e .
The message Feature stored appears briefly at thethat you have saved the feature.
89
the Later button
S positions.
he Road form appears:
e logging icon to let you know
ne feature, travel along the line.oExplorer 3 will log a GPSured interval set when thein the Data Dictionary Editor.joined together to form a line.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial4: In the field
Collecting a line feature using1. From the New feature list, press 5 to highlight Road.
You can record the attributes of the road without logging GP
2. Press4 to highlight the Later button, and press E. T
NOTE When you use the Later button, a pause icon flashes over ththat the GeoExplorer 3 is not logging GPS positions.
In order to record a liAs you do so, the Geposition at the configfeature was createdThese positions are
Pauseicon
90
e the Text entry field to type the
E (at the bottom of the screen)
keys on the GeoExplorer 3ighlight the letter P and then. A “P” appears in the edit barf the screen. Continueopriate letters until you haveword PINE. Use the SPACE
e function bar) to add a spaces in the edit bar. To do this,
CE and press E . ThenROAD.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial4: In the field
3. The Name field is already highlighted, so press E. Usname of the road, PINE ROAD:
4. When finished, presse. Alternatively, highlight CLOSand pressE .
Use the arrowhandheld to hpress Enear the top oselecting apprcompleted thefunction (in thbetween wordhighlight SPAenter the word
Edit barFunctionbar
Closebar
91
ified that it was required. So ife, the GeoExplorer 3 warns you
the data dictionary in the officeed to change the value.
ld. A pop-up list appears. From
eature.
the road feature.
essage from the screen,
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial4: In the field
When you created the Name attribute in the office, you specyou attempt to close the road feature without entering a namthat it is required and will not let you go any further:
5. The speed limit for Pine Road is 10 mph. When you createdyou set 10 mph as the default, so in this case you do not ne
NOTE If you do need to change the value, select the Speed Limit fiethe list select the correct value.
6. Pressl to begin logging GPS positions for the road f
7. When you reach the end of the road, presse to close
To clear an “Error” mpress e .
92
g the Later
have not yet reached the waterle on the way to it.
cet .
n to start recording theture before you actually get to it.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial4: In the field
Collecting a point feature usinbuttonThe next feature you are going to collect is a water faucet. Youfaucet, but you can enter the sample test tube and the date whi
1. From the New feature list, press 5 to highlight Water Fau
2. The Later button is already highlighted, so pressE.
Later button
Use the Later buttoattributes for a fea
93
ou set the date to auto-generateit the value by selecting the Date
e GeoExplorer 3 starts loggings.
feature and store it.
Pauseicon
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial4: In the field
3. The Water Faucet form appears:
NOTE When you use the Later button, a pause iconflashes over the logging icon to let you know thatGeoExplorer 3 is not logging GPS positions.
4. Enter the attributes for the water faucet now, sothat when you arrive at the feature, you can startlogging GPS positions.
5. Select the Test Tube Number field and enter132. For more information, see Numeric entry.
6. The date attribute automatically appears. This is because ywhen you created it in the office. If you need to, you can edfield. A numeric entry field appears.
7. When you reach the water faucet feature, press l. ThGPS positions for this feature and the pause icon disappear
8. Select the ID Number field and enter 15.
9. Record sufficient positions, then press e to close the
94
res. Use these values shown
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial4: In the field
10. Repeat this procedure to create two more water faucet featubelow for the Test Tube Number and ID Number fields:
95
re.
d this feature in the office, no
rea feature, you travel aroundrea. As you do so, thea GPS position at the
t when the feature was createdEditor. These positions arethe perimeter of the area.
positions are joined together tore is no need to return to the
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial4: In the field
Collecting an area feature1. From the New feature list, press 5 to highlight Lake featu
2. Press2 to highlight the Now button, and pressE.
The GeoExplorer 3 starts to log positions. When you createattributes were assigned.
In order to record an athe perimeter of the aGeoExplorer 3 will logconfigured interval sein the Data Dictionaryjoined together to form
The first and last GPSclose the area, so thestart point.
96
this, pressd until the Mapn the map, along with the lake
ay look different to the map
an view the map at differents. To do this, press m.t the Zoom in/Zoom out option.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial4: In the field
3. You can view the DATA map while collecting features. To dotab is active. The features that you collected are displayed operimeter that you are currently collecting.
NOTE Depending on the scale you are using to view your map, it mshown above.
You cscaleSelec
Current
Currentposition
Feature
PointLine
97
ake and you want to stop andould stop logging positions for
rer 3 stops logging positions andollecting the lake feature, pressrs.
till active and the GeoExplorer 3
sse to close the feature.
ke data collection more efficient.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial4: In the field
4. You can pause logging if required.
For example, if you are driving around the perimeter of the lexamine a picnic shelter some distance from the lake, you wthe lake boundary. To do this, pressl . The GeoExploa pause icon flashes over of the logging icon. To continue cl again to resume logging. The pause icon disappea
For more information, see Pause and resume logging.
5. Pressd to go back to the New tab. The Lake form is sis still logging positions for the lake.
6. When you have driven around the perimeter of the lake, pre
TIP There are several advanced techniques that you can use to maFor more information, see Advanced data collection.
98
Explorer 3 handheld. This
ile is closed, and the handheld is
ss e until the File tab
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial4: In the field
Closing a fileWhen the data collection session is completed, turn off the Geoautomatically closes the data file.
To turn off the GeoExplorer 3 handheld, presso . The data fturned off.
TIP To close the data file that you are using and start a new file, preappears.
99
tatatatae National Park, use the GPSnsfer it to the GIS.
view the data. Topics are:
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial5: Processing the data
5555 Processing the daProcessing the daProcessing the daProcessing the daWhen you return from your data collection session in WaterstonPathfinder Office software to process the data collected and tra
This part of the tutorial shows you how to transfer, process, and
• Transferring data
• Differentially correcting data
• Viewing data
• Exporting data to a GIS
100
xplorer 3 to the office computer.to the office computer is easy.
pport module. Make sure that
athfinder Office software.
Transfer.
the GeoExplorer 3 handheld.
er on COM 1 or GIS Dataloggerrt module is connected to) or youandheld.
xplorer 3 handheld.
iles on the data collector.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial5: Processing the data
Transferring dataYou need to transfer the data collected in the field from the GeoETransferring data from the GeoExplorer 3 data collection system
1. Place the GeoExplorer 3 handheld in the GeoExplorer 3 suthe support module is connected to the office computer.
The GeoExplorer 3 is ready to communicate with the GPS P
2. In the GPS Pathfinder Office software, select Utilities / Data
The Data Transfer dialog appears.
3. From the Device list, select the device name that represents
You can use one of the predefined names (GIS Dataloggon COM 2, depending on which serial (COM) port the suppocan set up a new device definition for your GeoExplorer 3 h
The Data Transfer utility automatically connects to the GeoE
4. Select the Receive tab.
5. Click Add and select Data File from the list.
The Open dialog appears. The files shown are the current f
101
ame(s) and click Open.
pear in the Files to Receive list:
fault to the current project folder.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial5: Processing the data
6. Select one or more files to be transferred. Highlight the filen
The Open dialog disappears, and the selected data files ap
The Destination that the files are to be transferred to will de
102
ld.
r appears. Click Close to close it.
nt or almanac files.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial5: Processing the data
7. Click Transfer All.
The data files are transferred to the GeoExplorer 3 handhe
8. A message showing summary information about the transfe
9. To close the Data Transfer utility, click Close.
NOTE You can also use the Data Transfer utility to transfer waypoi
For more information, refer to the GPS Pathfinder Office Help.
103
ing satellite clock andthe error from the data, andcy of the receiver.
Correction utility by selectingrom the GeoExplorer 3 appears
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial5: Processing the data
Differentially correcting dataThe data collected by GPS receivers is subject to errors, includatmospheric errors. Differential correction can remove much ofimproves the accuracy of GPS positions to the specified accura
1. In the GPS Pathfinder Office software, start the DifferentialUtilities / Differential Correction. The last file(s) transferred fin the Selected Files field.
104
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial5: Processing the data
The following dialog appears:
105
ns available: Local Search forult, base files are stored in theed to change the Folder path forou have searched for or selectedars:
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial5: Processing the data
2. Specify the location of your base files.
Depending on the source of base files, there are three optiobase files, Internet Search for base files, or Browse. By defacurrent project’s base file folder on your local drive. If you nethe Local Search for base files option, click Browse. Once ythe base files, the Confirm Selected Base Files dialog appe
106
e selected base files provideon dialog appears:
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial5: Processing the data
3. Use the Confirm Selected Base Files dialog to make sure thcoverage for the rover files. Click OK. The Reference Positi
4. Click OK to confirm the reference position.
107
current project folder.
lected.
ifferential correction. Click Close
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial5: Processing the data
5. Specify the output folder. By default, the output folder is the
6. Select a processing option.
By default, Smart Code and Carrier Phase Processing is se
7. Click OK to differentially correct the selected files.
8. The Differential Completed dialog details the results of the dto close this dialog.
108
you can display, edit, and plot it.field data. Use it to makecan specify the colors, symbols,
asy way to verify the integrity of
n. Select the data file(s) that you:\Pfdata\Geo3 Tutorial).
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial5: Processing the data
Viewing dataWhen the data has been transferred and differentially correctedThe GPS Pathfinder Office Map window is the best way to viewgraphical queries and measurements on the collected data. Youand line styles for each feature. The Map window provides an ethe field data.
To view the data:
1. From the GPS Pathfinder Office menu bar, select File / Opewant to view. The current project folder is the default path (C
109
p:
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial5: Processing the data
2. From the GPS Pathfinder Office menu bar, select View / Ma
The Map window displays the selected file.
Lake feature
110
lick the feature. The Featurebout the selected feature.
stance between the two points is
dow display, refer to the View
ftware to edit data, you can
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial5: Processing the data
3. To display the attributes of any feature on the map, double-cProperties dialog appears. It provides attribute information a
4. Change the color of the Lake feature. Right-clickthe Lake feature on the map. From the shortcutmenu select Lake Layer Style. The Lake styledialog appears. Use this dialog to change the colorof the lake area to blue.
5. You can also measure between positions andfeatures, and compute areas. For example, youcan compute the distance between the Roadfeature and the Lake feature. To do this, selectData / Measure from the GPS Pathfinder Officemenu bar. The cursor becomes a ruler when theMap window is displayed. Click a point on theRoad feature. Then click a point on the Lake feature. The dicomputed and displayed at the bottom of the screen.
For more information about the GPS Pathfinder Office Map winmenu topic in the GPS Pathfinder Office Help.
NOTE After using the Map window in the GPS Pathfinder Office soexport the data to your GIS.
111
s .ssf file format files into aort point, line, and area features,other formats.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial5: Processing the data
Exporting data to a GISThe Export utility in the GPS Pathfinder Office software convertformat that can be read by a GIS or CAD system. It lets you exp(together with their attributes and GPS positions) to a variety of
112
by selecting Utilities / Export:
the Selected Files field.
in the current project.More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial5: Processing the data
To export data to a GIS:
1. In the GPS Pathfinder Office software, start the Export utility
By default, the last file(s) differentially corrected appear(s) in
2. Select the output folder. By default, this is the export folder
113
rmat.
rt. Click Close to close this
now open it in your GIS.
, such as transfer, differentialcome back from the field,
r 3 support module. TheGeoExplorer 3 is in thetch Processor to meet your
Pathfinder Office Help.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial5: Processing the data
3. Select the Export setup.
4. Click OK to export the selected file(s) to the specified GIS fo
5. The Export Completed dialog details the results of the expodialog.
6. The file is now in the format required by your GIS. You can
NOTE You can increase productivity by automating repetitive taskscorrection, and export, using the Batch Processor. When yousimply place the GeoExplorer 3 handheld in the GeoExploreConnection Manager utility automatically recognizes that thesupport module and runs the Batch Processor. Set up the Badata requirements.
For more information about batch processing, refer to the GPS
114
tetetetethe GeoExplorer 3c edition.
faucets in Waterstone NationalExplorer 3 data collection systemnd the Waterstone datae faucets. This part of the tutorialreparing to take thefield to update data. Topics are:
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial6: Preparing for update
6666 Preparing for updaPreparing for updaPreparing for updaPreparing for updaNOTE Data update, using transferred .ssf files, is not available with
A month has passed and it is necessary to re-sample the waterPark. A different Park Ranger is going to be doing this. The Geoand a real-time source will be used to navigate to each faucet, adictionary will be used to verify and update the attributes for thosgives step-by-step instructions that should be performed when pGeoExplorer 3 and the Beacon-on-a-Belt (BoB) receiver into the
• Using real-time differential corrections
• Checking the memory
• Deleting files
• Locking the configuration and tasks
• Transferring GIS data
• Checking the equipment before going into the field
115
al
atures and waypoints using thes you can accurately navigate to
eal-time source to receive RTCMlorer 3 then applies thehis gives greater accuracy and
ed to use RTCM. If necessary,(in the field) or the Configuration
can use an alternative source
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial6: Preparing for update
Using real-time differenticorrectionsTo update existing data, back in the field, you can navigate to feRoad, Compass, or Chart tabs. Using RTCM real-time correctionany specific location.
In this tutorial, you use the Beacon-on-a-Belt (BoB) receiver rand transmit the information to the GeoExplorer 3. The GeoExpdifferential corrections to GPS positions computed in the field. Tsaves postprocessing time in the office.
By default, the GeoExplorer 3 data collection system is configuryou can change the Real-time settings using the GeoExplorer 3Manager (in the office).
NOTE If you do not have the Beacon-on-a-Belt (BoB) receiver, youof real-time differential corrections.
116
S data in the field, transfer thesethe memory level to make suremake space for the GIS data.
e Status bar.
his case there is not muchaining memory. For this project,need to delete some files to
ate space before transferring thefiles. See Deleting files.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial6: Preparing for update
Checking the memoryBefore using the GeoExplorer 3 to verify and update existing GIdata files. Before transferring them to the GeoExplorer 3, checkthat sufficient space is available. If necessary, delete old files to
To check the memory levels using the Status tab:
1. Press o to turn on the GeoExplorer 3 handheld.
2. Presss until the Status tab is active:
NOTE When the memory level is low, the memory icon flashes in th
Memory gauge
In tremyoucreGIS
Memory icon
117
n system so that you can transferds on the project.
the File tab is not displayed.
t appears:
displays information about thee list and shows the free spacer 3 data collection system.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial6: Preparing for update
Deleting filesDeleting files creates space on the GeoExplorer 3 data collectiodata and collect new data. The amount of space required depen
To delete files:
1. Pressd . The File tab appears.
NOTE If a file is currently open, press e to close it. Otherwise
2. Pressm and select Delete file(s). The Delete file(s) lis
The message boxhighlighted file in thon the GeoExplore
Messagebox
118
lete and pressE . You are
computer, the Please confirmsferred to the PC:o to cancel the deletion.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial6: Preparing for update
3. Use the Delete file(s) list to select the file that you want to deprompted to confirm deletion. Select Yes to delete the file:
4. Presse to close the Delete file(s) list.
NOTE If the selected data file has not been transferred to the officemessage appears: File ‘x’ has not been tranDelete anyway?. Select Yes to delete the file. Select N
119
n and tasksrotect it to make sure that it is notets your specifications. You can
changed in the field. Use theare to apply a password to the
les personally. A member of your3 data collection system so that
/ Other / Configuration Manager.
log any GPS data betweenock this field so that no GPS data
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial6: Preparing for update
Locking the configuratioWhen you set up a configuration in the office, you may want to pchanged in the field. This makes sure that the data collected mealso protect certain tasks to prevent files from being deleted orConfiguration Manager utility in the GPS Pathfinder Office softwconfiguration and specific tasks.
This month you will be unable to go and collect the water sampfield crew will be collecting them. You can lock the GeoExplorerdata files cannot be deleted. To do this:
1. Start the Configuration Manager utility by selecting Utilities
2. Select File / New. A configuration dialog appears.
3. In the Configuration field, type Waterstone 1.
4. Make sure the Data tab is selected.
5. Highlight the Log between features field. You do not need tofeatures because such data is not required for this project. Lis collected unless a feature is being recorded.
120
dialog). This locks the Log
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial6: Preparing for update
6. Select the Password locked check box (at the bottom of thebetween features field.
121
pears.
rd in the Password field:
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial6: Preparing for update
7. Click Password Settings. The Password Settings dialog ap
8. Select the Data files: Delete check box and type the passwo
122
(s).
eoExplorer 3 once in the field.
nfiguration file to the same folderutorial).
ettings to be changed. If you, lock it by applying a password.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial6: Preparing for update
9. Click OK to accept the password and lock the selected task
NOTE You will need this password to delete any data files on the G
10. Save the new Waterstone configuration. You can add the coas the data dictionary files. (For example, C:\Pfdata\Geo3 T
11. Select File / Exit to close the Configuration Manager utility.
For more information, refer to the GPS Pathfinder Office Help.
TIP Locking and unlocking is useful when you do not want certain screate a configuration for a certain job and do not want it altered
123
e required information from thethfinder Office software, use the
f file format required by theransfer data between the office
GeoExplorer 3 data collection
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial6: Preparing for update
Transferring GIS dataBefore going into the field for a data update session, transfer thGIS to the GeoExplorer 3 data collection system. In the GPS PaImport utility to convert data from a GIS data format into the .ssGeoExplorer 3. Then use the Data Transfer utility to efficiently tcomputer and the GeoExplorer 3.
This part of the tutorial outlines how to transfer GIS data to thesystem.
124
u bar, select Utilities / Other /
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial6: Preparing for update
To convert GIS data to SSF format:
1. Start the Import utility. From the GPS Pathfinder Office menImport:
125
th specified for the output file is
p.
ies to make changes.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial6: Preparing for update
2. Click Browse and select the input file(s). By default, the pathe current project folder.
3. In the Choose an Import Setup group, select an import setu
4. Make sure that all import settings are correct. Click Propert
5. Click Browse to change the output folder or filename.
6. Click OK to import the file(s).
For more information, refer to the GPS Pathfinder Office Help.
126
xplorer 3 data
the GeoExplorer 3c edition.
r Office software, use the Datareated in Locking the
the GeoExplorer 3, thehe file.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial6: Preparing for update
Transferring files to the GeoEcollection system
NOTE Data update, using transferred .ssf files, is not available with
Once the data from the GIS is imported into the GPS PathfindeTransfer utility to transfer it, and the configuration file that you cconfiguration and tasks, to the GeoExplorer 3.
NOTE When you transfer a data file from GPS Pathfinder Office toassociated data dictionary is automatically transferred with t
127
ce menu bar, select Utilities /
the GeoExplorer 3 handheld.
er on COM 1 or GIS Dataloggerrt module is connected to) or youandheld.
xplorer 3 handheld.
m the list. The Open dialog
ghlight it and click Open.
ct Configuration File from the list.
efault, this is the last folder that
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial6: Preparing for update
To transfer files to the GeoExplorer 3 data collection system:
1. Start the Data Transfer utility. From the GPS Pathfinder OffiData Transfer.
The Data Transfer dialog appears.
2. From the Device list, select the device name that represents
You can use one of the predefined names (GIS Dataloggon COM 2, depending on which serial (COM) port the suppocan set up a new device definition for your GeoExplorer 3 h
The Data Transfer utility automatically connects to the GeoE
3. Select the Send tab.
4. First, select the data file. Click Add and select Data File froappears.
5. The data file that you imported appears in the list of files. Hi
6. Now select the configuration file to send. Click Add and seleThe Open dialog appears.
7. Select the folder where the configuration file is located. By dwas used to transfer a configuration file.
128
nd click Open.
tion file appear in the Files to
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial6: Preparing for update
8. The configuration file appears in the list of files. Highlight it a
The Open dialog disappears, and the data file and configuraSend list:
129
oExplorer 3 handheld.
r appears. Click Close to close it.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial6: Preparing for update
9. Click Transfer All.
The data file and configuration file are transferred to the Ge
10. A message showing summary information about the transfe
11. To close the Data Transfer utility, click Close.
130
before
quipment and that it is working
n in the support module. You canthe handheld out of the support
e GeoExplorer 3 is on, use the
ve the BoB receiver or the cableif necessary.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial6: Preparing for update
Checking the equipmentgoing into the fieldBefore going into the field, check that you have the necessary ecorrectly.
For the previous tasks the GeoExplorer 3 data collector has beecheck if the internal power source is fully charged without takingmodule. If the GeoExplorer 3 is off, use the Standby mode. If thStatus bar.
Check that the real-time source is fully charged, and that you hato connect the real-time source to the GeoExplorer 3 handheld,
131
the GeoExplorer 3c edition.
llect the monthly water samples.GeoExplorer 3 data collectionre are some tasks that you needime source to navigate back to
dating existing GIS data, using
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial7: Back in the field
7777 Back in the fieldBack in the fieldBack in the fieldBack in the fieldNOTE Data update, using transferred .ssf files, is not available with
Your supervisor has sent you to Waterstone National Park to coThe configuration and data files have been transferred onto thesystem for you, but before starting the data update session, theto complete. You can then use the GeoExplorer 3 and the real-tthe water faucets and update the attributes.
This part of the tutorial contains step-by-step instructions for upreal-time corrections, and navigating. Topics are:
• Initial tasks
• Navigating to and updating features
• Creating a waypoint
• Closing the file
132
llowing tasks:
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial7: Back in the field
Initial tasksBefore starting a real-time data update session, complete the fo
• Checking the GPS status
• Configuring the GPS slider bar
• Checking the real-time status
133
d geometry, in order to computeollection system, it automaticallyn. Use the satellite icon in the
positions. If the satellite icon anduting GPS positions.
ailable to compute GPSore favorable.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial7: Back in the field
Checking the GPS statusThe GeoExplorer 3 needs a minimum of four satellites, with gooa 3D GPS position. When you turn on the GeoExplorer 3 data cstarts to track visible satellites and to calculate its current positioStatus bar to check if the GeoExplorer 3 is computing satellitethe number below it are not flashing, the GeoExplorer 3 is comp
If the satellite geometry is poor, or there are too few satellites avpositions, adjust the GPS slider bar or wait until conditions are m
134
rction system that you shouldand logging intervals). Configurether (non-critical) settings to suit
ar to best suit the environment of
ironment has several areasou need to adjust the GPS sliderns to be recorded. Some of theositions ensures that there are
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial7: Back in the field
Configuring the GPS slider baThere are some critical settings in the GeoExplorer 3 data colleconfigure before collecting data (for example, the GPS settingsthese before leaving the office, or in the field. You can also set oyour application or preferences.
The following steps show you how to configure the GPS slider bWaterstone National Park.
Waterstone National Park is mostly forest area. This type of envwhere the tree canopy obstructs the view of the sky. Therefore, ybar from the default middle position to Low to allow more positiopositions recorded may have lower quality, but recording more pfewer gaps in the data collected.
135
guration screen appears.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial7: Back in the field
To configure the GPS slider bar:
1. Presss until the Setup tab is active.
2. Highlight Configurations and press E . The Edit confi
136
you collect more positions, butin a forest area where trees cansults. If the slider bar is set toonough positions will be collected
Configuration Manager utility,
h setting on the GPS slider bara project requires the highestecision.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial7: Back in the field
3. Select the GPS button. The GPS slider bar appears:
4. Press2 to lower the GPS slider bar four notches. This letssome may be less precise. Because you are collecting datablock your view of the sky, this may provide better overall rehigh, the precision of the positions collected is high, but not eto map the entire park. For more information, see GPS.
NOTE To adjust the GPS slider bar using the GPS Pathfinder Officerefer to the GPS Pathfinder Office Help.
TIP Use a higwheneverlevel of pr
137
eal-time corrections, alwaysse the Status tab to view the
GeoExplorer 3 data collectionGeoExplorer 3 is computing
ears. This icon flashes if thereno GPS position.
his screen to check that thexplorer 3 is receiving corrections
the Beacon-on-a-Belt (BoB)er. When the GeoExplorer 3 ising differential corrections, the
ime position icon appears. Thisndicates the type of RTCMe. For this tutorial, theon-on-a-Belt (BoB) icon appears.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial7: Back in the field
Checking the real-time statusWhen using the Beacon-on-a-Belt (BoB) receiver to provide rcheck the real-time status before recording data or navigating. Ureal-time status.
Press s until The Status tab is active.
NOTE You can also use the Status bar on the right to check that thesystem is computing real-time corrected positions. When thereal-time corrected positions, the real-time position icon appis a problem with the real-time source connection, or there is
Real-timeinformation
Use tGeoEfromreceivreceivreal-ticon isourcBeac
Real-timeicon
138
ng featureseatures recorded previously. Theo navigate—a road, a compass,r personal preference.
ot know where they are. Use thenavigate to them.
this section the following tasks
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial7: Back in the field
Navigating to and updatiWhen updating GIS data, use The NAV section to navigate to fGeoExplorer 3 data collection system provides three methods tand a chart view. Select the method that suits your application o
You did not record the original water faucet features, so you do nGeoExplorer 3 data collection system and a real-time source to
There are different ways to select a feature and navigate to it. Inare explained:
• Opening a data file
• Using the Search function
• Updating the data
• Navigating to a target using the Chart tab
• Navigating to a target using the Road tab
139
ins the GIS data. Use the File tab
lly selected in the File field as
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial7: Back in the field
Opening a data fileBefore starting the data update session, open the file that contato do this.
To open an existing file:
1. Pressd . The File tab appears.
2. Press4 to highlight Open selected file.
The data file that you transferred from the GIS is automaticathis was the last data file transferred to the GeoExplorer 3.
140
list appears:
e features to update them.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial7: Back in the field
3. PressE to open the selected file. The Update feature
You have opened a data file, so you can now navigate to th
141
ich feature you need to visit
list.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial7: Back in the field
Using the Search functionWhen you have many features to select from, and you know whbased on an attribute value, you can search for it.
To search for a target:
1. Pressm to display the options for the Update feature
2. Press5 and highlight Search.
3. PressE to display the Search form:
142
.
need to search for a particular
s E.
earch form:
ucet.
sufficient for what you need.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial7: Back in the field
4. Press5 to highlight the Feature Type field and press EYou will see a list of the features in your data dictionary. Youwater faucet.
5. Press the5 arrow key to highlight Water Faucet and pres
You can now see the Attribute field has been added to the S
6. PressE to display the list of attributes for the water fa
7. Press5 to highlight ID Number and press E.
The Operator field can be changed, but the value Equals is
8. Press5 to highlight Attribute Value and pressE.
143
ter faucet:
ow all you need to do is set this
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial7: Back in the field
9. Type 15 as the attribute value number and press e.
The value 15 is now shown as the Attribute Value for the wa
10. Presse to carry out the search.
Water Faucet 15 is highlighted on the Update feature list. Nfeature as the target.
11. Pressm and highlight Set Target.
144
g symbol appears beside the
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial7: Back in the field
12. PressE.
You have selected a feature to navigate to. The crossed-flafeature to confirm that you have set it as the target:
13. Pressn until the Chart tab is active.
145
he arrow represents the directionlay the date, time, and current
ter faucet and take a water
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial7: Back in the field
Here the crossed-flag symbol represents the water faucet, and tin which you are moving. The Info windows at the bottom dispcoordinates.
You can use the information on the screen to navigate to the wasample.
146
ata update tab to update the
faucet is still highlighted,the target.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial7: Back in the field
Updating the dataNow that you have navigated to the water faucet, return to the Dattributes.
To update a feature:
1. Pressd. The Update feature list appears:
Notice that the waterbecause you set it as
147
ure.
fy that you are updating theID number of the feature you
Test Tube Number attribute. A
The number on this month’s test
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial7: Back in the field
2. PressE to display the attribute entry form for this feat
3. The first attribute is the ID Number. Use this attribute to vericorrect water faucet. The number on the faucet matches thehave opened on the GeoExplorer 3 handheld, so select theNumeric entry field appears.
4. Use the Numeric entry field to enter the test tube number.tube is 234, so enter this into the field.
5. The Date is automatically updated by the GeoExplorer 3data collection system. Presse to save the attributechanges and return to the Update feature list.
Notice that a tick appears in the check box to show that thewater faucet has been updated. For more information, seeUpdating attribute values.
NOTE A check box appears next to the features in the Updatefeature list for files transferred from the GPS PathfinderOffice software. When a feature is updated, a ✓ appears inthe check box.
148
e Chart tabart view. This is another way of
eys to move the cursor towardsbel appears with the attribute
d Test Tube number—to help you
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial7: Back in the field
Navigating to a target using thYou can also select the features you want to update from the chmaking sure that you are navigating to the correct feature.
1. Pressn until the Chart tab is active.
2. To activate the cursor, press any arrow key. Use the arrow kthe closest feature. When the cursor is over the feature, a lainformation that you defined in the office—the ID number anidentify the correct faucet.
149
key.
t.
e selected target.
for the first water faucet that you
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial7: Back in the field
3. With the water faucet feature highlighted, press the EThe Select target screen is displayed:
4. PressE to accept the highlighted feature as the targe
5. Use the information displayed on the chart to navigate to th
6. When you reach the target, update its attributes as you didrevisited. For more information, see Updating the data.
150
e Road tabd direction, to assist you when
ou may not be able to drive
her water faucet to navigate to.
ted water faucet feature.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial7: Back in the field
Navigating to a target using thThe Road tab provides useful information, such as distance annavigating to a target, especially when traveling in a vehicle.
WARNING The Road tab displays a straight line bearing to the target. Ydirectly to a target using this tab as a source of direction.
To navigate to a feature using the Road tab:
1. Pressn until the The Road tab is active.
2. From the Option list, choose Select Target and choose anot
The road on the screen moves as you navigate to the selec
151
animation of the road to navigate
symbol. The direction you aream above, the Road signnd Distance info windows tosymbol until the distance is zero.ases.
the screen. When you are offcreen. The angle (clockwise orow far off course you are.
t
rline
indows
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial7: Back in the field
3. Use the information displayed in the Info windows and theto the target.
The Road screen displays your current position as a personmoving is always towards the top of the screen. In the diagrindicates that the target is front of you. Use the Road sign aguide you to the target. You need to move toward the targetAs you move closer to the target, the width of the road incre
When you are on course, the road is displayed vertically oncourse, the road is displayed skewed (at an angle) on the scounterclockwise) at which the road is turned depends on h
Targe
Cente
Info w
Your currentposition
Target name
152
loser to the target, the Distanceion, see Using the Road tab.
u did for the first water faucetdata.
oad sign, and Velocity. You canpreference.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial7: Back in the field
As you follow the directions in the Info windows and move cdecreases and the road width increases. For more informat
4. When you reach the water faucet, update its attributes as yothat you revisited. For more information, see Updating the
TIP By default, the Info windows on the Road tab show Distance, Rconfigure the Info windows to suit your application or personal
153
allen tree. Mark it as a waypoint,
handheld (in the field) or usingic point of interest that is not part
s recorded for a waypoint andrily used for navigation, and canate waypoint file.
e. You can use the Option list to
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial7: Back in the field
Creating a waypointWhile in the field collecting water samples, you come across a fso that the field crew can navigate back to it and clear the path.
A waypoint is a single position created using the GeoExplorer 3the GPS Pathfinder Office software. Use it to record a geographof your data file.
A waypoint is different from a feature. No attribute information ithe GPS position is not linked to a data file. Waypoints are primabe transferred to the GPS Pathfinder Office software as a separ
A waypoint has a number, name, latitude, longitude, and altitudcreate and edit waypoints.
154
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial7: Back in the field
To create a waypoint at your current location:
1. Pressm . The option list appears:
2. Select New waypoint.3. The GeoExplorer 3 automatically names the new
waypoint. The Name field is already highlighted, so pressE to change the name. Use the Text entry field toclear the default name and enter TREE as the new namefor the waypoint.
NOTE If the cursor is active, the waypoint is automatically giventhe default name, “CursorXXX”.
155
position as the position of the
r Office software. For more
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial7: Back in the field
4. The GeoExplorer 3 automatically assigns your current GPSwaypoint. Press e .
TIP Waypoints can be created in the office using the GPS Pathfindeinformation, refer to the GPS Pathfinder Office Help.
156
e GeoExplorer 3 handheld.
e GeoExplorer 3 handheld.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial7: Back in the field
Closing the fileWhen you have completed your data update session, turn off th
To do this, press o. This closes the data file and turns off th
IntroductionGeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions 157
III: III: III: III: ADVANCED FUNCTIONSADVANCED FUNCTIONSADVANCED FUNCTIONSADVANCED FUNCTIONSWhen using the GeoExplorer 3 data collection system to collect and update data, you can use avariety of advanced functions to provide more accurate and efficient results. The following topicsare discussed here:
• Advanced data collection
• Carrier phase data collection
• Coordinate systems
158
llectionllectionllectionllectiones for efficient data collection.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions8: Advanced data collection
8888 Advanced data coAdvanced data coAdvanced data coAdvanced data coAdvanced data collection techniques offer time-saving techniquStep-by-step instructions are provided for:
• Advanced datalogging options
• Recording positions only
• Continuing line and area features
• Segmenting line features
• Offsets
• Averaged vertices
• Repeating features
159
ptions-related options for logging GPS
relative to the start of a feature.
ure.
re.
er.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions8: Advanced data collection
Advanced datalogging oThe GeoExplorer 3 data collection system provides three closelydata. These options differ in their timing of GPS data collection
• Before – start collecting GPS positions before starting a feat
• Now – simultaneously collect GPS positions and start a featu
• Later – start a feature, then start collecting GPS positions lat
160
ntains a large number of featuremust scroll through the list to findfeature. The GPS positionsure that you select. This meansropriate feature type.
lect the start and end of linef a bridge, press l to startress l to pause logging.
e, and enter the attributes. Presscorded before starting the
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions8: Advanced data collection
BeforeThis option is useful when you are using a data dictionary that cotypes. For example, if a data dictionary has 50 features and youthe feature to record, you can start logging and then select thecollected and stored are automatically assigned to the next featthat you can collect extra GPS data while searching for the app
You can also use the Before option to quickly and efficiently colfeatures. For example, if you are driving and come to the start ologging GPS positions. When you reach the end of the bridge, pThen scroll through the feature list, select the bridge feature type to close the feature and assign all GPS data that you refeature.
161
he GeoExplorer 3 data collectionears in the Status bar.
inimum configured loggingal, select Edit feature settings.
Before option, select the feature
l to stop logging if no
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions8: Advanced data collection
To use the Before option:
1. Pressd until The New tab is active. Pressl . Tsystem starts to log GPS positions and the logging icon app
NOTE When using the Before option, the logging interval used is the minterval (for all features). To change the minimum logging interv
2. To assign the GPS positions to a feature collected using thefrom the New feature list. The attribute entry form appears.
3. Presse to stop logging and store the feature. (Pressfeature is selected.)
Logging icon
New feature list
162
ollection system is recorded intinuously. If you do not want toollecting feature and attributeall features. To change this
ere you do not need to recordant to record a breadcrumb trail
t feature or attribute information,
ionary. The data dictionary
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions8: Advanced data collection
Recording positions onlyMost of the GPS data you collect with the GeoExplorer 3 data cfiles rather than as waypoints. A file lets you store positions conuse a data dictionary, you can collect positions in a file without cdata. Positions are recorded at the minimum logging interval forinterval, select Edit feature settings.
Recording just GPS positions is a useful technique in cases whfeature and attribute data. A utility company, for example, may wof the day’s activities. In this case, you would not want to colleconly the positions.
To record GPS positions only:
1. Create a new file using The File tab.
NOTE The Dictionary field must have a value. Use the Generic dictselected does not matter as it will not be used.
2. Pressl to start logging GPS positions.
3. Pressl to pause logging GPS positions.
4. Presse to stop logging.
163
featurespoint feature that you need to
it may be some distance away.counter a gate (point feature).rd the gate. Simply end the path
on to continue the path feature
ting.
s you want. The number is.
cting . The New feature list
e entry form appears and logging
logged sufficient GPS positions,ears again.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions8: Advanced data collection
Continuing line and areaWhen recording a line or area feature, you might come across arecord. The point feature may be along the line/area feature, orWhen collecting a path (line feature), for example, you might enYou do not have to record the entire path and then return to recofeature, collect the gate feature, and then use the Continue optiyou were collecting.
NOTE Other Trimble GIS products refer to this functionality as Nes
NOTE You can collect as many point features within a line or area alimited only by storage space in the GeoExplorer 3 handheld
To use Continue:
1. Presse to close the line or area feature you are colleappears.
2. Select the point feature that you want to collect. The attributstarts.
3. When you have recorded attributes for the point feature andpress e to store the feature. The New feature list app
164
rea feature name>. Theor area feature that you were
eature.
r, press e to store the
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions8: Advanced data collection
4. Pressm. From the option list, select Continue <line/aGeoExplorer 3 returns to the attribute entry form for the linelogging before and continues to log GPS positions for that f
5. When you complete the traverse of the line or area perimetefeature.
165
ne into a number of segments.values for parts of the same
y start another of the same type,s where it is difficult (or illegal) to
ment.
f the same type is immediatelyThe last GPS position of the firstature, so that adjacent segments
attributes of the first linegment to store one feature and
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions8: Advanced data collection
Segmenting line featuresWhen collecting line features, it is often convenient to divide a liSegmenting line features allows you to specify different attributephysical line. You can also end one line feature and immediatelwhile still moving. This is useful when mapping roads or highwaystop at the point where one feature ends and the next starts.
To segment a line feature:
1. Start collecting the line feature.
2. From the attribute entry form, press m and select Seg
The current line feature is stored and another line feature ostarted with the same attribute values as the previous one.feature is identical to the first GPS position of the second fejoin end-to-end in the GIS.
NOTE When you select Segment, the GeoExplorer 3 validates thefeature. Always complete attribute entry before selecting Sestart another.
166
ble (because of poor satelliteith the last GPS position of them the first GPS position thatsegments.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions8: Advanced data collection
CAUTION If you select Segment and no current GPS position is availageometry, for example), the GeoExplorer 3 does not start wprevious line feature. Instead, the new line feature starts frobecomes available. In this case, a gap occurs between the
167
n enter an offset and record it atple, it is typically easier to standd record its attributes. This
assess its condition. Specify anositioned correctly in the GIS.
on. Select Offset to view or enterconfiguring constant offsets, see
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions8: Advanced data collection
OffsetsIf you cannot travel alongside or over the top of a feature, you cathe specified distance. When collecting a tree feature, for examsome distance (such as 10 paces to the North) from the tree anensures good GPS reception, and lets you see the tree clearly tooffset to the tree of “10 m South”. This ensures that the tree is pThis is an example of an offset point feature.
The attribute entry form for each feature type has an Offset optithe offset for the feature being collected. For information aboutFeature settings.
168
, when collecting a line featurethe fence and record therea feature such as a lake, youimeter using an offset. These
ociated with it. This means thate offset during the line feature,
e feature has its own offset. Toust apply to the whole area
e sure that you can remain a
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions8: Advanced data collection
You can also use offsets for line and area features. For examplesuch as a fence, it may be easier to drive along the road besidepositions of the fence as an offset feature. When collecting an acould walk some distance from the lake edge and record its perexamples are shown below:
NOTE Any feature (point, line, or area) can have only one offset assto record a line feature with a given offset and then change thyou must segment the line at that point. Each segmented lincollect an area feature using offsets, the same offset value mfeature. This may require a test run around an object to makconsistent distance from it.
Area offsetdistance
Line offsetdistance
Path traveledaround lake
169
et. An Offset form appears:
a entry field to enter the value.
ute entry form reappears.
d sufficient GPS positions, press
pen and select Reset.
at appear in the Offset formhe type of feature you areoint, line, or area). Thisws the fields for a line or areaa point feature the fields are:z. distance, and Vert. distance.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions8: Advanced data collection
To offset a feature:
1. Start the feature.
2. From the attribute entry form, press m and select Offs
3. Enter a value for each field. Select the field and use the dat
4. When the Offset form is complete press e . The attrib
5. When you have recorded attributes for the feature and loggee to store the feature. The New feature list appears.
NOTE To remove an offset, press m while the Offset form is o
The fields thdepend on tcollecting (pexample shofeature. ForBearing, Hor
170
re, you can use the averagedn a line or area feature that arecord a baseball diamond, rather, you can collect an averagedaveraged vertex position, and so
both normal positions andseful when a road or park, for
and displayed as, a singlen view and edit the individualoftware. For more information,
the line or area feature has bothitions and then record averaged
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions8: Advanced data collection
Averaged verticesTo record positions with greater accuracy for a line or area featuvertex function. An averaged vertex is a group of positions withiaveraged and displayed as a single position. For example, to rethan walking round the entire area logging continuous positionsvertex position at home base, move to first base, collect anotheron until you have logged all the bases around the diamond.
With the GeoExplorer 3 you also have the flexibility of collectingaveraged vertex positions within a line or area feature. This is uexample, is made up of both straight and curved parts.
Once collected and saved, an averaged vertex is converted to,position. It is also exported as a single position, although you capositions that make up the vertex in the GPS Pathfinder Office srefer to the GPS Pathfinder Office Help.
You can record an averaged vertex at any time. For example, ifcurved and straight parts, you can begin logging continuous posvertices, or vice versa. Both methods are described below.
171
ng begins immediately ined vertices, are recorded.)
e New tab.
with Step 2.
x:
mediately.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions8: Advanced data collection
To log a feature starting with an averaged vertex:
1. Select Later as the logging mode. (If Now is selected, loggicontinuous mode, and normal positions, rather than averag
1. Start the area or line feature from the New feature list on Th
2. Pressm and follow the instructions below, beginning
To continue logging a feature but record an averaged verte
1. In The New tab, press m.
2. Select New vertex from the list and press E.
A Vertex form for the feature appears, and logging starts im
172
rtex open and Remain
the feature form.
ge is displayed. For eachsteps above.
s logged for the vertex are
of positions recorded for thex is shown in the status bar,gging averaged vertex icon
on
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions8: Advanced data collection
While an averaged vertex is being logged, the messages Vestationary are displayed.
3. Presse to accept and save the vertex, and return to
When the vertex is saved, the Vertex stored messaaveraged vertex you want to record, repeat the appropriate
TIP Press fe to abandon the current vertex. The positionabandoned but any attribute information is retained.
The numbercurrent verteabove the lo( ).
Logging averaged vertex ic
173
atures because you do not haveute value is correct for thed.
recorded feature of that type.overwritten by repeated values.
epeat and pressE.ption list.
appears. The attribute valuese. Edit them if necessary. Press
e Repeat mode.
ppears.
ermined by the data dictionary.te belonging to a feature where
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions8: Advanced data collection
Repeating featuresUsing Repeat lets you efficiently record a sequence of similar feto re-enter values for all attributes. Simply check that each attribselected feature and change only those that need to be change
When you use Repeat, attribute values are copied from the lastAny default attribute values specified in the data dictionary are
To Repeat attributes for similar features:
1. When the New feature list is active, pressm, select RA ✓ appears in the check box. Press e to close the o
2. Select a feature from the New feature list. The attribute formthat appear are those of the last recorded feature of that type to save the attribute values and store the feature.
3. Select another feature. Continue until you want to turn off th
To turn off the Repeat mode:
• Pressm, select Repeat and pressE. The ✓ disa
NOTE When Repeat is not selected, default attribute values are detThe data dictionary specifies a default value for each attribuappropriate.
174
n
collectioncollectioncollectioncollectiona, configure the GeoExplorer 3
n describe in detail how to collect
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions9: Carrier phase data collectio
9999 Carrier phase data Carrier phase data Carrier phase data Carrier phase data To collect a feature with a precision better than regular GPS datdata collection system to log carrier phase data.
The following topics introduce you to the basic concepts and theand use carrier phase data.
• Before you begin
• Configuring the GeoExplorer 3 data collection system
• In the field
• Back in the office
175
n
ith using carrier phase data.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions9: Carrier phase data collectio
Before you beginThe following topics discuss some of the concepts associated w
• Why use carrier phase data?
• Planning
• Collecting sufficient data
• Time
• Recording features
• Postprocessing
176
n
dent GPS positions. If enoughg reliable positions.
collected in the field can beyou are back at the office.llite, the positions generatedthe field.
arrier phase data, so avoide of day when you can expect tometry.
in the field.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions9: Carrier phase data collectio
Why use carrier phase data?In a conventional GPS session, the GeoExplorer 3 logs indepensatellites are visible and the geometry is good, it continues to lo
When the GeoExplorer 3 also logs carrier phase data, positionsfurther postprocessed to generate more precise positions onceBecause measurements are collected from each individual sateduring postprocessing are more precise than positions logged in
PlanningYou require a clear view of the sky at all times when collecting cobstacles such as trees, bridges, and tall buildings. Choose a timtrack a maximum number of satellites with the best possible geo
NOTE Always make sure that you collect sufficient useful data while
177
n
enough time to provide sufficient
recision, the GeoExplorer 3 datafor the required minimum time.fore the postprocessing softwaresatellites together provide these more.
ops below four.
during a session, you greatly
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions9: Carrier phase data collectio
Collecting sufficient dataAlways make sure that at least four satellites remain visible foruseful data for postprocessing.
Number of satellitesTo provide sufficient carrier phase data to achieve the required pcollection system needs to log data from at least four satellitesHowever, you will need to log data from at least five satellites becan compute the precision of the generated positions. The fivenecessary redundancy for the precision required, but you can u
“Loss of lock” occurs when the number of available satellites dr
NOTE If you minimize the number of times that loss of lock occursincrease the precision of the postprocessed results.
178
n
, the GeoExplorer 3 datas four or more satellites ared, all of the carrier phase data.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions9: Carrier phase data collectio
When you start a file that has any features configured to carriercollection system starts to record carrier phase data. As soon aavailable, a counter starts. When the minimum time has elapserecorded during that period can be used during postprocessing
179
n
ilable is 10 minutes. Thethan 10 minutes in length.
as soon as four or more
played in the message box. It.
llected until then may not providecounter is automatically reset to
ined.
rrier phase data from four orlapsed since the beginning of
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions9: Carrier phase data collectio
TimeThe minimum time for which four or more satellites must be avaDifferential correction software will not process data blocks less
CounterA counter in the GeoExplorer 3 handheld starts to measure timesatellites are available.
When the counter reaches the minimum time, a message is disindicates that the current “block” contains sufficient useful data
If you lose lock before the end of the minimum time, the data cothe required precision during postprocessing. Consequently, thezero when loss of lock occurs. It only restarts when lock is rega
NOTE The counter is active only if the GeoExplorer 3 is logging camore satellites—it does not simply record the time that has ethe file.
180
n
ends on a combination of the, and the period of time for whichgenerally gives more precise
re shows the relationshipnd the precision of the positions
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions9: Carrier phase data collectio
Time and precisionThe precision of positions generated during postprocessing depnumber of satellites used, the distance between base and roverdata is recorded from those satellites. Collecting data for longerpositions.
Assuming that enough satellites are available, the following figubetween the time taken to collect carrier phase measurements agenerated during postprocessing.
Time
Erro
r
longer baseline
short baseline
181
n
, the GeoExplorer 3 handheldstored as one continuous
er of available satellites. As soonis block continues until lock is
ut the file. These blocks together
of each other, so carrier phase
eed to collect sufficient datafile or reopen an existing one.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions9: Carrier phase data collectio
What is a “block” of data?When you start a file that has any features configured to carrierstarts to record carrier phase measurements. Useful data is notstream, however, but as a series of “blocks”.
The beginning and end of each block is determined by the numbas four (or more) satellites are available, a new block begins. Thlost. When lock is regained, a new block begins.
The GeoExplorer 3 continues to create blocks of data throughoconstitute the measurement data for the entire session.
Opening and reopening filesThe files that you create in the GeoExplorer 3 are independentdata collected in one file is of no use to another.
If you use the GeoExplorer 3 to collect carrier phase data, you nevery time you open a file—this is true whether you open a newAlways make sure that you collect sufficient data for each file.
182
n
blocks of carrier phase data as
A = 4 or more satellites –useful carrier phase data
B = lock is lost –unusable carrier phasedata
C = lock is regained (4 ormore satellites) –useful carrier phase data
D = lock is again lost –unusable carrier phasedata
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions9: Carrier phase data collectio
The figure below shows how the GeoExplorer 3 creates distinctthe number of satellites changes.
Time in minutes
Num
bero
fsat
ellit
es
5
4
3
2
1
5 10 15 5020 25 30 40 4535
6
7
8
BLOCK BLOCK
A
B C
D
183
n
at 35 minutes when lock is lostum time required for thessfully is 10 minutes, so the firstin time, the greater the precision
not met. The counter does notot used.
creates a new block and thee, this happens 38 minutes afterer 7 minutes worth of data hasthis block does not contain
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions9: Carrier phase data collectio
In the previous figure, the counter begins at time zero and stops(B). This creates the first block of carrier phase data. The minimdifferential correction utility to process carrier phase data succeblock contains sufficient useful data. The longer the blocks areachieved.
Between B and C, the required minimum number of satellites isstart, and the carrier phase data collected during this period is n
When four satellites are again available (C), the GeoExplorer 3counter begins to measure again from time zero. In this examplthe start of the session. Lock is lost again at 45 minutes (D), aftbeen collected. Since the required minimum time is 10 minutes,sufficient continuous data.
184
n
phase measurements in thelines, or areas.
Look for obstructions (such aslock or sufficient satellites.
atellites are available. OnceeoExplorer 3 counter starts.
e is reachedand stay where you are until the, you can move to the nextfficient data to generate precise
ove to the next feature before
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions9: Carrier phase data collectio
Recording featuresWhile the GeoExplorer 3 data collection system collects carrierbackground, you start to record features—these can be points,
Decide carefully when to start and stop recording feature data.trees) that may affect the ability of the GPS receiver to maintain
Before starting the first feature in a file, wait until four or more scarrier phase data from at least four satellites is received, the G
Ending a feature before minimum timOnce the counter is running, you can choose to end the featureminimum time is up. When the minimum carrier time is achievedfeature. Using this method, you can make sure that you have supositions.
Alternatively, if you think you are unlikely to lose lock, you can msufficient carrier phase data is collected.
185
n
u can generate precise positions
carrier phase data stored at the
eature A was started after the, but during postprocessing it
ul data was recorded. You
e
C
BLOCK 3
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions9: Carrier phase data collectio
As long as a block eventually contains sufficient useful data, yofor any feature that falls within it.
This figure shows how individual features benefit from blocks oftime they were recorded.
In this example, Block 1 contains sufficient carrier phase data. Fcounter started for Block 1 and ended before the success beepderives the full benefit of all data recorded for Block 1.
Feature B was unwisely recorded during a period when no usefprobably need to record this feature again.
Blocks of carrier phase data
Individual features logged during this tim
BLOCK 1 BLOCK 2
A B
186
n
ging to this feature continuedloss of lock and a new block ofnimum carrier time was achievedortion of the feature collected) should achieve the desired
with Block 3 may not achieve the
if loss of lock is unlikely.
y should be high rather than low
ou move
cate how useful the current datayou can measure that feature
data, recapture any features that
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions9: Carrier phase data collectio
Feature C was started when the counter started for Block 2. Logafter the minimum carrier time was achieved. Then there was acarrier phase data started. The feature was ended before the mifor this block of data, and the file was closed. In this case, the pbefore the loss of lock occurred (indicated by the end of Block 2precision. However, the second portion of the data, associateddesired precision.
CAUTION Move to the next feature before the minimum time is up only
As you record features, be aware of the following:
• the number of satellites available
• the position of these satellites—if they are to stay visible, theon the horizon
• any obstruction likely to cut off your view of the satellites as y
Read any messages that appear in the message box. They indiis. The message box also shows if loss of lock has occurred, soagain if necessary. If it is clear that a block contains insufficientare affected before leaving the site.
187
n
ential Correction utility of the
ion system also logs code phase
the carrier phase data tostores these results over the toph the arrangement of the new
nerated positions. This helps you
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions9: Carrier phase data collectio
PostprocessingPostprocess all data using an office computer running the DifferGPS Pathfinder Office software.
In addition to carrier phase data, the GeoExplorer 3 data collectdata in the field.
During postprocessing, the Differential Correction software usesgenerate positions of high precision. It computes positions, andof the code phase data. The code phase data simply assists witpositions.
Finally, the software computes the estimated precision of the geto evaluate the GPS results.
188
n
orer 3 data
rer 3 data collection system as
e data collection.
ears.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions9: Carrier phase data collectio
Configuring the GeoExplcollection systemIf you decide to use carrier phase data, configure the GeoExplofollows:
1. Decide which features you want to collect using carrier phas
2. Presss until the Setup tab is active.
3. Select Feature settings. The Select feature settings list app
189
n
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions9: Carrier phase data collectio
4. Select the name of the data dictionary to be usingduring the carrier phase data collection session. TheEdit feature settings screen appears:
NOTE This list shows all features contained in the selected datadictionary. The specified logging interval for each featureis also shown.
5. To configure an individual feature, select it from the list.The corresponding <feature> settings form appears:
NOTE Use this form to edit the logging interval and minimumnumber of positions required, and to change theaccuracy.
By default, the accuracy is set to Code. Change this toCarrier. Press e to close the form and save allchanges.
190
n
data.
.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions9: Carrier phase data collectio
6. Pressm to configure all points, all lines, or all areafeatures. The Edit feature settings option listappears:
NOTE Use these options to make the same change to allfeatures of a particular type.
Select one of the options. The corresponding Set all<feature type> form appears. By default, the accuracy isset to Code. Change this to Carrier. Press e toclose the form and save all changes.
You are now ready to go into the field and collect carrier phase
TIP To close a form without saving the changes, press fe
191
n
ightly different from those useder phase data collection session
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions9: Carrier phase data collectio
In the fieldThe techniques used when collecting carrier phase data are slwhen collecting code phase (C/A code) GPS positions. A carriincludes the following tasks:
• Opening a new file using The File tab
• Collecting carrier phase data
192
n
ermined by the data dictionarycreated.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions9: Carrier phase data collectio
Collecting carrier phase dataWhen a data file is open, the New feature list appears:
Features in this list are detspecified when the file was
193
n
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions9: Carrier phase data collectio
To collect carrier phase data:
1. Start a feature by selecting it from the New feature list. Ifthe feature is configured for carrier, the GeoExplorer 3begins logging carrier phase data. The Carrierstarted message appears briefly in the messagebox.
NOTE The logging icon will change to the carrier phase loggingicon when carrier phase logging starts.
2. Check the carrier time. As you log carrier phase data, theGeoExplorer 3 displays the time elapsed since the currentblock of data started. This is referred to as “carrier time”.The carrier time appears in the message box at theconfigured feature logging interval and shows, in minutesand seconds, the amount of data collected.
194
n
continuously for at leastge appears in the message boxen recorded.
se data.
full time before moving on toefore minimum time is
close the file.
ve logged sufficient carrierlock. All positions in this blocke processed in the GPSftware.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions9: Carrier phase data collectio
3. Stay at the feature until you have logged carrier phase data10 minutes. The Carrier time achieved messato indicate that 10 minutes of continuous carrier data has be
4. Presse to close the feature and save the carrier pha
NOTE Trimble recommends that you occupy the first feature for theother features. For more information, see Ending a feature breached.
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 for the next feature.
6. When you are finished collecting features, presse to
This means you hadata in the current bcan be carrier phasPathfinder Office so
195
n
xplorer 3 warns you wheneverThe Carrier lostus line. The counter is reset andssage shows 00:00.
3 writes a note to the data fileet. This records when the carriernote back at the office using thene.
reoccupy the affected features oreve the carrier precision.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions9: Carrier phase data collectio
If you try to close the file before the minimum time is up,the GeoExplorer 3 asks for confirmation that you want toclose the file.
While you are loggingcarrier phase data, the GeoEthe GPS receiver loses lock.message appears in the statthe Carrier time me
In addition, the GeoExplorerevery time the counter is restime was reset. Review thisGPS Pathfinder Office timeli
If the minimum time is not reached, you can choose whether tomove on. If you move on, the affected feature is unlikely to achi
196
n
the GeoExplorer 3 handheld inr utility that is part of the GPS
rrection utility. For instructions on
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions9: Carrier phase data collectio
Back in the officeTo transfer data from the handheld to the office computer, placethe GeoExplorer 3 support module and use the Data TransfePathfinder Office software.
Process the files using the GPS Pathfinder Office Differential Coprocessing data files, refer to the GPS Pathfinder Office Help.
197
ssssGPS data, you can configure thesplay coordinates using theorking in. The following topics
collection system
eoExplorer 3c edition.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions10: Coordinate systems
10101010 Coordinate systemCoordinate systemCoordinate systemCoordinate systemWhen using the GeoExplorer 3 data collection system to collectcoordinate system, zone, and datum. This lets you enter and dicoordinate system that best suits you and the location you are ware discussed:
• Coordinate systems and datums
• Coordinate systems available on the GeoExplorer 3 data
• Using Coordinate System Manager
• Transferring coordinate systems
• Configuring coordinate systems
• Resetting coordinate systems
NOTE Transferring of coordinate systems is not available with the G
198
datumsed to describe the location ofvides you with your positionstem you have configured.
t sources, the data must beecause different datums andgle geographic location.
es relative to a mathematicalrld Geodetic System 1984 datumellipsoid and an origin point. Ansphere, which approximately
icular part of the earth). The
data capture applications,IS will represent the coordinatesr grid (running North and East)n be defined to provide a goodtransformation and a mapl ellipsoid to the GIS’s flat-earth
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions10: Coordinate systems
Coordinate systems andCoordinate systems are three-dimensional reference frames usobjects in space. The GeoExplorer 3 data collection system proanywhere on the earth’s surface in relation to the coordinate sy
Before you can compare geographic data obtained from differenreferenced to the same datum and coordinate system. This is bcoordinate systems provide different coordinate values for a sin
GPS positions are normally expressed as latitudes and longitudmodel called a datum. The datum used by GPS is called the Wo(or WGS-84). A datum is defined by the relationship between anellipsoid is a three-dimensional surface shaped like a squashedmodels the shape of the earth (either as a whole, or over a partWGS-84 datum is defined in terms of the GRS80 ellipsoid.
For most land-based GPS applications, and particularly for GISlatitudes and longitudes are much less convenient. Typically, a Gof geographic features in a locality of interest using a rectangulaand will presume that the earth is locally flat. A local ellipsoid caapproximation to the shape of the earth in that locality. A datumprojection are then used to transform coordinates from this locamodel.
199
r a local ellipsoid, or ansurface over which the earth’s
cations:
well
earth’s surface locally
earth’s surface as a whole
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions10: Coordinate systems
Heights can be displayed by the GeoExplorer 3 relative to eitheempirically defined surface known as the geoid. The geoid is agravity is constant. (The geoid represents mean sea level.)
In summary, there are three models for describing geographic lo
• the flat North, East model of the GIS, possibly with heights as
• the curved local ellipsoid, used by the GIS as a model of the
• the curved GRS-80 ellipsoid, used by GPS as a model of the
The earth’s surface
The geoid
The local ellipsoid
The GRS-80 ellipsoid (WGS-84 datum)
200
ce the WGS-84 datum) and thenes and longitudes need to be
tudes on the WGS-84 datum intoration is called a datum
on the local datum, they mustg an operation called a mapeed to be transformed fromr reference level. The mosto as mean sea level. Theffice software both contain a
es relative to GRS-80 into
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions10: Coordinate systems
These models can describe heights as being relative to either:
• an ellipsoid
or
• the geoid (mean sea level)
In order to collect the positions of features using GPS (and hensend them to a GIS as North, East coordinates, the GPS latitudprocessed in a number of ways.
They need to be transformed from latitudes, longitudes, and altilatitudes, longitudes, and altitudes on the local datum. This opetransformation.
Once the coordinates are expressed as latitudes and longitudesthen be projected into North and East values on a flat grid, usinprojection. Finally, if altitudes are to be stored by the GIS, they nheights above the GRS-80 ellipsoid to heights above some othecommon reference level is the geoid, more commonly referred tGeoExplorer 3 data collection system and the GPS Pathfinder Ogeoid separation model which enables them to transform altitudheights relative to mean sea level.
201
GPS Pathfinder Office softwaree, while GPS Pathfinder Office isrence level, or relative to a moreprocess the heights in the GPS
a map projection, so that youy have recorded) in your localsition or navigate using a mapwill be shown relative to your
bundles up the complexities ofmplexities behind the commonar. Each named coordinateid) and a number of zones (each
e Coordinate System Manageret of pre-defined coordinate
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions10: Coordinate systems
The geoid separation models used by the GeoExplorer 3 and thediffer in accuracy. The GeoExplorer 3 is necessarily approximatmore accurate. If you require altitudes relative to a different refeaccurate (perhaps local) mean sea level mode, you will need toPathfinder Office software before exporting them to your GIS.
The GeoExplorer 3 lets you specify a datum transformation andcan see your GPS position (and the position of features you macoordinate system. This makes it easy for you to check your poproduced by your GIS. It also allows you to specify that heightslocal ellipsoid, or relative to mean sea level.
For your convenience, the GeoExplorer 3 data collection systemdatum transformations and map projections, and hides these conames for the coordinate systems with which you may be familisystem has an associated datum (which encapsulates an ellipsoof which is a named instance of a particular map projection).
You can create your own coordinate systems and sites using thutility program in the GPS Pathfinder Office software. With the ssystems supplied by Trimble this should rarely be necessary.
202
lable on thection systemare supplied with two coordinate
evel or Height Above Ellipsoid)
Most National CoordinateData Transfer utility in the GPS
bal) model. This is different fromsult, MSL heights on theder Office software.
r Office software to a
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions10: Coordinate systems
Coordinate systems avaiGeoExplorer 3 data colleThe GeoExplorer 3 and GeoExplorer 3c data collection systemsystems:
• Lat/Long – latitude, longitude, and height (above Mean Sea L
• UTM – northing, easting, and elevation
There are also over 100 datums already on the GeoExplorer 3.Systems are supported, and you can easily load these using thePathfinder Office software.
NOTE You cannot use local sites.
NOTE The default geoid on the GeoExplorer 3 is the DMA 10x10 (Glothe default used by the GPS Pathfinder Office software. As a reGeoExplorer 3 may differ to those displayed in the GPS Pathfin
NOTE You cannot load coordinate systems from the GPS PathfindeGeoExplorer 3c edition.
203
Managerer Office software, to create and
er utility from GPS Pathfinder
systems and zones.
ort.
d the related support files, usethe GeoExplorer 3.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions10: Coordinate systems
Using Coordinate SystemUse the Coordinate System Manager utility, in the GPS Pathfindedit custom coordinate systems for use with the GeoExplorer 3.
To use Coordinate System Manager:
1. On the office computer, start the Coordinate System ManagOffice.
2. Use the tabs in the main window to select or edit coordinate
3. Export the coordinate system database file. Select File/Exp
The Export dialog appears.
4. Select the Select records only option in the Export dialog.
5. Click OK.
The Save As dialog appears.
6. Specify the new file name and click Save.
When you have saved the coordinate system database files, anthe Data transfer utility to transfer the coordinate system files to
For more information, refer to the GPS Pathfinder Office Help.
204
ystemstware, to transfer coordinaten system and the office
ake sure that the support module3 is in the
files.
e GPS Pathfinder Office
the GeoExplorer 3 handheld.
on COM 1 or GIS Datalogger onmodule is connected to), or youandheld.
xplorer 3 handheld.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions10: Coordinate systems
Transferring coordinate sUse the Data Transfer utilities, in the GPS Pathfinder Office sofsystems and grid files between the GeoExplorer 3 data collectiocomputer.
To transfer coordinate systems and grid files:
1. Place the GeoExplorer 3 handheld in the support module. Mis connected to the office computer. Once the GeoExplorerGeoExplorer 3 support module, it is ready to transfer data
2. On the office computer, start the Data Transfer utility from thsoftware.
The Data Transfer dialog appears.
3. From the Device list, select the device name that represents
You can use one of the predefined names (GIS DataloggerCOM 2, depending on which serial (COM) port the supportcan set up a new device definition for your GeoExplorer 3 h
The Data Transfer utility automatically connects to the GeoE
4. Select the Send tab.
205
pe field. In this case, selectFile.
, select the correct System andK.
id File, the Open dialog appearst folder used to transfer (send) a
Data Transfer dialog.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions10: Coordinate systems
5. Click Add and select the appropriate file type in the Data TyCoordinate System, Coordinate System Export File or Grid
• If you selected Coordinate System from the Add listDatum in the Coordinate System dialog, and click O
• If you selected Coordinate System Export File or Grwhere you can browse for the file. By default, the lasfile is shown. Select the file and click Open.
6. The file you selected is added to the Files to send list in the
206
nsferred. (When the size of thehe transfer, as it will use up a
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions10: Coordinate systems
7. Click Transfer All. All files in the Selected Files field are trafile(s) is greater than 200 KB, you are prompted to confirm tconsiderable portion of the data collector’s memory.)
207
which zone is to be transferredion Manager can only transfern, the appropriate Coordinaterdinate System Manager utility
E files containing coordinateAmerica.CSE contains all theer utility, select Coordinatepre-defined coordinate system
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions10: Coordinate systems
NOTE You can also use the Configuration Manager utility to specifyto the GeoExplorer 3 data collection system. The Configuratone zone. If you specify a zone and transfer this configuratioSystem Export file (.CSE file) is also transferred. Use the Cooto transfer more than one zone.
For more information, refer to the GPS Pathfinder Office Help.
NOTE The GPS Pathfinder Office software contains pre-defined CSsystems for a number of regions of the world. For example,coordinate systems for the Americas. Using the Data Transfsystem in the Data Type drop-down menu to display a list offiles.
208
ystems, zone, and datum parameters.tum transformation and a mapon of features you collect, in yourur position or to navigate using a
rs.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions10: Coordinate systems
Configuring coordinate sYou can use the Coordinates form to edit the coordinate systemThe GeoExplorer 3 data collection system lets you specify a daprojection so that you can see your GPS position, and the positilocal coordinate system. This makes it easy for you to check yomap produced by your GIS.
To configure the Coordinates form:
1. Presss until the Setup tab is active.
2. Select Configurations. The Edit configuration screen appea
3. Select Coordinates. The Coordinates form appears:
4. Use this form to specify the coordinate system, zone,datum, altitude reference, and geoid. You can also specifythe units used to display the coordinates and altitude. Formore information, see Coordinates.
209
temseoExplorer 3. To do this reset thede/Longitude and UTM, are
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions10: Coordinate systems
Resetting coordinate sysYou can remove the transferred coordinate systems from the Glist of coordinate systems. All coordinate systems, except Latituremoved.
To reset the list of coordinate systems:
1. Presss until the Setup tab is active.
2. Select Configurations.
The Edit configuration screen appears.
3. Select Coordinates. The Coordinates form appears:
4. Highlight the System field and pressm.
5. Select Reset coordinate systems. You are prompted toconfirm the reset.
6. Select Yes to remove the coordinate system file from theGeoExplorer 3. Latitude/Longitude becomes the newcurrent system. Select No to cancel the reset operation.
NOTE You cannot delete Latitude/Longitude or UTM from thelist.
IntroductionGeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference 210
IV: IV: IV: IV: REFERENCEREFERENCEREFERENCEREFERENCEThis Reference provides detailed information about screens that appear when you use theGeoExplorer 3 data collection system.
General operation describes different ways to interact with the GeoExplorer 3. It also explainshow to use the keys and screens. Other topics correspond to different areas of the software.
The GeoExplorer 3 software is arranged in three “sections”:
• The SYS section • The DATA section • The NAV section
211
r 3 user interface and data entry
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
11111111 General operationGeneral operationGeneral operationGeneral operationThis section contains detailed information about the GeoExploremethods. The topics covered are:
• Turning the GeoExplorer 3 handheld on and off
• Adjusting the display
• Rebooting the GeoExplorer 3 handheld
• GeoExplorer 3 menu structure
• The GeoExplorer 3 display
• Status bar
• Interacting with the GeoExplorer 3 data collection system
• Password control
212
3 handheld
ff.
ff key). A Trimble identificationorms a self-test. This is replacedys returns to the GPS tab when
the On/Off key) for one second.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
Turning the GeoExploreron and offThis explains how to turn the GeoExplorer 3 handheld on and o
OnTo turn on the GeoExplorer 3 handheld, presso (the On/Oscreen appears for a few seconds while the GeoExplorer 3 perfby the GPS tab. The GeoExplorer 3 data collection system alwaturned on.
OffTo turn off the GeoExplorer 3 handheld, press and hold o (
213
ode.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
Adjusting the displayThis explains how to adjust the screen contrast and backlight m
• Backlight
• Screen contrast
214
reen. The screen is easiest to
nditions. The backlight is alwayshanged to one of three states byWhen the backlight is in the
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
BacklightThe GeoExplorer 3 handheld displays information on an LCD scread when viewed directly from the front.
The screen can be backlit to make viewing easier in poor light cooff when the GeoExplorer 3 is turned on. The backlight can be cpressing fd. The states are Off, Normal, and Bright.normal or bright state, an icon appears in the Status bar.
CAUTION Operating the backlight uses more power.
215
creen contrast. To lighten the.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
Screen contrastDepending on viewing conditions, you may need to adjust the sscreen contrast, press fn. To darken it, press fs
216
rer 3
o key presses you need toto shut down.
e GeoExplorer 3 handheld to
hold down for 10 seconds. The
rm a warm boot. No data loss
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
Rebooting the GeoExplohandheldIf the GeoExplorer 3 handheld locks up and does not respond tperform a warm boot. This causes the GeoExplorer 3 hardware
NOTE Whenever possible, before rebooting, transmit any data in than office computer.
Warm bootTo perform a warm boot on the GeoExplorer 3, press o andGeoExplorer 3 turns off. Press o again to turn it on.
NOTE This procedure causes the GeoExplorer 3 hardware to perfoshould occur as a result of performing this procedure.
217
e Trimble logo starts spinning.ously.
d, it is too late to attempt a cold
ill remove any data file,ystems you may have loaded
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
Cold bootTo perform a cold boot, turn the GeoExplorer 3 handheld on. ThWhile the logo is spinning, press E and d simultane
NOTE Once the logo stops spinning and the first screen is displayeboot. Repower the unit and try again.
WARNING This procedure clears the memory of the GeoExplorer 3. It wconfigurations, data dictionaries, waypoints, or coordinate sonto the GeoExplorer 3.
218
cture, DATA, and NAV.
screen. To move between tabs,. Each time you press the
xample, to move between the. As you move between the SYS
nt. Alternatively, you can use the
n, press the corresponding key3 handheld. For example, tosection to the DATA section,
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
GeoExplorer 3 menu struThe GeoExplorer 3 firmware is arranged in three sections: SYS
Within each section are three tabs that appear at the top of thepress the corresponding section key: s, d, ornsame section key, you move to another tab in that section. For ethree different tabs in the SYS section, presss three timestabs (GPS, Status, and Setup), the current tab moves to the fromain menu to move between sections and tabs.
To move to a sectioon the GeoExplorermove from the SYSpress d.
219
ns and their corresponding tabs.
the arrow keys to highlight the
section is File. When a data file
r 3c edition.
arrow keys to move aroundn menu. The currently activeighlighted. Press E toe Main menu and go to thetab.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
Main menuUse the Main menu to move around the system and view sectioPress fm to display the Main menu.
For example, to move from the Chart tab to the Status tab, useStatus tab and then pressE.
NOTE When no data file is open, the only tab available in the DATAis open, the New, Update, and Map tabs are all available.
NOTE The Map and Chart tabs are not available in the GeoExplore
Use thethe Maitab is hclose thcurrent
Currenttab
Section
DATA tabsNAV tabs
SYS tabs
keys
220
e satellites that theand their relative positions in
current position.e GeoExplorer 3 hardware,l connections.
ionaries and feature settings.the configuration. You candata collection system to the
open an existing one.attributes.
ibutes.them for update.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
Section tabsThis table summarizes each of the tabs:
Use this tab … to …
SYS
GPS view information about thGeoExplorer 3 is trackingthe sky, and to see your
Status view information about thaccessories, and externa
Setup create and edit data dictAlso, use this tab to editreset the GeoExplorer 3factory defaults.
DATA
File create a new data file or
New collect new features andUpdate update features and attrMap view features and select
221
waypoints using the Road.waypoints using the
waypoints using the Chart.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
NAV
Road navigate to features and
Compass navigate to features andCompass.
Chart navigate to features and
Use this tab … to …
222
re3 menu structure. Use them as a
Dataictionary
Featuresettings
ResetAbout
mmmm
Feature Feature
mmmm
list list
mmmm
mmmm
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
GeoExplorer 3 section structuThe next three diagrams provide an outline of the GeoExplorerhandy reference until you are familiar with the structure.
GPS tab SETUP tabSTATUS tab
Configurationmode
Standardmode
Advancedmode
StandardmodeDGPS
d
Dataform
GPSform
Real-timeform
Coordinatesform
Unitsform
Formatsform
COMMSform
Otherform
ssss
mmmm mmmm
mmmm mmmm
223
Deletefile(s)
Rename BaseStationfile(s)
mmmm mmmm
Position/
elete LayersFilter
mmmm
earch
Search
mmmm
SummarySet/ClearTarget
Set/ClearTarget
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
entryText
mmmm
NEW tab MAP tabUPDATE tab
New feature list Update feature list
FILE tab
entry form
mmmm
mmmmAttributeentry form
mmmm
Attribute
ddddmmmm
entryNumeric
entryMenu
entryDate & Time
mmmmOffset Segment
mmmm
Sort(Un)Delete Filter
mmmm
inZoom
outZoom
extentsZoom
SelectPan/ D
mmmm
mmmm
S
mmmm
ContinueRepeat
mmmm
line/area
Newvertex
224
CHART tab
mmmm
outoom
extentsZoom
SelectPan/Info
windows
t waypointsEdit Delete
waypoints
mmmm mmmm
startSelect Layers
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
ROAD tab COMPASS tab
nnnn
mmmm mmmm
windowsInfo
targetSelect
waypointNew
waypointsEdit Delete Select
waypoints startRoadscale
mmmm mmmm mmmm
windowsInfo
targetSelect
waypointNew
waypointsEdit Delete Select
waypoints startCalibration
mmmm mmmm mmmm
inZoom Z
targetSelect
waypoinNew
mmmm
225
ythe GeoExplorer 3 display.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
The GeoExplorer 3 displaSome common displays are shown here to describe features of
Active section
Status
Field
Tabs
Buttons
Title
Fieldprompt
List
Messagebox
value
bar
226
visible. The icons displayeder 3 data collection system. Forlow.
onn
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
Status barThe status bar is the area of the display on the right. It is alwaysdepend on what you are doing, and the status of the GeoExplorexample, the memory icon flashes when the memory is critically
Internal power icon
Satellite icon
Real-time position icExternal antenna icoLock iconMemory icon
Logging icon
Backlight icon
Target icon
227
accompanied by a warningwithin 15 meters of the target.
try of the satellites is good orS configuration settings. Thisstatus bar. When the
tion system is computing GPSthe satellite icon indicates
ing used to compute positions.warn you that the geometry of
umber flashes to indicate thatble. You need a minimum ofPS positions.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
Icon Name DescriptionTarget icon Shows for three seconds (
beep) when you approach
Satellite icon Shows whether the geomepoor depending on the GPicon is always visible in theGeoExplorer 3 data collecpositions the number belowhow many satellites are beThe satellite icon flashes tothe satellites is poor. The ntoo few satellites are availafour satellites to compute G
228
rer 3 is computing real-timeosition icon flashes when the-only mode and a real-time, or when the RTCM age limit
ed on The Status tab. Tottings, use the Real-time
nal antenna is properlyrnal antenna is connected thisot appear, there is a problemantenna (internal andlayed on the Status tab.
n setting or task is locked. Toassword control.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
Real-timeposition icon
Shows that the GeoExplopositions. The real-time pGeoExplorer 3 is in RTCMposition cannot be loggedhas been exceeded.RTCM details are displayconfigure the real-time sebutton.
External antennaicon
Shows whether the exterconnected. When an exteicon appears. If it does nwith the connection. Theexternal) details are disp
Lock icon Shows that a configuratiounlock it you must have P
Icon Name Description
229
evel is low (< 100 KB). Thisaining memory is critically
ry details are shown on The
is on. The backlight has twond Bright. When the backlightchange the state of the
.
ernal power source. This iconatus bar. The battery iconel of the power source is high.source decreases, the leveldecreases. The icon flashes
l is low. The battery iconthe internal power is being
etails are displayed on
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
Memory icon Shows that the memory licon flashes when the remlow (< 10 KB). The memoStatus tab.
Backlight icon Shows that the Backlightdifferent states: Normal ais off no icon is visible. Tobacklight press fd
Internal powericon
Shows the level of the intis always visible in the stappears full when the levAs the level of the powershown by the battery iconto warn you that the leveappears to be filling whencharged. Power source dThe Status tab.
Icon Name Description
Normal
Bright
230
xplorer 3 is successfullyis icon appears to be drawing
g GPS data; in the case ofncentric circles repeatedly
ove the icon indicates hown logged for the currenth if conditions do not meet theion. The logging icon has four
lorer 3 is logginge) measurements.lorer 3 has paused whiles. When logging is paused,ps recording GPS positionsWhen you start logging again,sumes logging GPS positionso the logging icon.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
Logging icon Shows whether the GeoElogging GPS positions. Thwhen successfully logginaveraged vertices, the cocontract.The number displayed abmany positions have beefeature. The icon will flasspecified GPS configuratdifferent states:
• Normal – the GeoExpcode phase (C/A cod
• Paused – the GeoExplogging GPS positionthe GeoExplorer 3 stoand this icon flashes.the GeoExplorer 3 reand the icon reverts t
Icon Name Description
Normal
Paused
231
rer 3 is logging carrier phaserier phase data collection orthe Feature settings button tocarrier accuracy.
GeoExplorer 3 is loggingthin a line or area feature.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
Logging icon(continued)
• Carrier – the GeoExplomeasurements for Carfor a base station. Useconfigure a feature for
• Averaged vertex – theAveraged vertices wi
Icon Name Description
Carrier
Averagedvertex
232
xplorer 3
n a variety of ways. The following
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
Interacting with the GeoEdata collection systemYou can interact with the GeoExplorer 3 data collection system itopics describe the keypad and the different types of displays:
• Keys
• Screens
• Lists
• Forms
• Option lists
• Pop-up messages
• Data entry
233
r 3 handheld.
/Off
tion
tion
keys
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
KeysThis diagram shows the location of the keys on the GeoExplore
Power On
EnterOp
SYS section
DATA section
NAV sec
Log
Function
ArrowClose
234
rer 3 handheld on and off.the GeoExplorer 3 when inGeoExplorer 3 support
NAV sections to an active tab
the SYS section then pressinggh the SYS tabs.
AV sections to an active tab in
the DATA section thenles through the DATA tabs.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
This table explains the various keys:
Key Name Use this key to …
o Power On/Off power the GeoExploAlso used to activateStandby mode in themodule.
s SYS section move from DATA orin The SYS section.If you are already ins cycles throu
d DATA section move from SYS or NThe DATA section.If you are already inpressing d cyc
235
ATA sections to an active tab
the NAV section then pressinggh the NAV tabs.
ighlight.
ighlight.ric digits in a numeric entry
play.and saving features and data
to move up sub levels.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
n NAV section move from SYS or Din The NAV section.If you are already inn cycles throu
2 4 Arrow keys move the cursor or h
15
Arrow keys move the cursor or hScroll through numefield.
e Close close the current disThis includes closingfiles. Also press e
Key Name Use this key to …
236
d item.ver you want to choose anen a field to edit.
me GPS logging.to control logging from almostt the GeoExplorer 3 data
y is explained inAdvanced datalogging
vanced options that areurrent screen.ne or more advanced options
key.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
E Enter select the highlightePress E wheneitem from a list or op
l Log start, pause, or resu
l can be usedany place throughoucollection system.Use of the l keCollecting data andoptions.
m Option display the list of adavailable from your cMost screens have oavailable from the m
Key Name Use this key to …
237
y function of certain keys.shown in blue on the keypad.function, press f and thenfunction key. You do not needs at the same time.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
f Function access the secondarThese functions areTo use a secondarypress the secondaryto hold down the key
Key Name Use this key to …
238
reen and cancel any changes.es to GPS or featurebe prompted to confirm the
.to select the tab you want to
.
s, d, or n topropriate screen.
ast.
.ings—Bright, Normal, and Off.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
Function Use this keycombination …
to …
Cancel fe close the current scThis includes changattributes. You maycancel operation.
Menu fm go to the Main menuUse the arrow keysgo to, then press EAlternatively, pressgo directly to the ap
Decrease contrast fs darken display contr
Backlight fd control the backlightThere are three sett
239
ast.
he top of the current display.cursor half a screen upwards.
he bottom of the currentthe Map cursor half a screen
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
Increase contrast fn lighten display contr
Page up f1 page up.Move the cursor to tAlso moves the Map
Page down f5 page down.Move the cursor to tdisplay. Also movesdownwards.
Function Use this keycombination …
to …
240
ing of a list or form.nd forms. Also moves the Mapto the left.
a list or form.nd forms. Also moves the Mapto the right.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
Home f2 return to the beginnUseful in long lists acursor half a screen
End f4 return to the end ofUseful in long lists acursor half a screen
Function Use this keycombination …
to …
241
nerally graphical and provideat let you access other displays.the options. Use screens to viewto other areas in the firmware.mation displayed.
e GPS screen in the GPS tab.n in different modes. Thisndard mode.
e to Advanced mode; press itard mode.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
ScreensIn the GeoExplorer 3, the top level screens for each tab are gequick visual feedback. Alternatively, a screen contains buttons thIn most of the screens you can press them key to displayinformation graphically or to select buttons that provide accessYou cannot enter data in a screen, and you cannot edit the infor
This example shows thYou can view this screeexample shows the Sta
Pressm to changagain to return to Stand
242
reen in the Setup tab.
o not need to close a screen to
to other areas of theection system. To select ae the arrow keys to highlight it
.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
This example shows a screen with buttons. This is the Select sc
Screens are “live”—any changes take place immediately. You dactivate changes.
Buttons provide accessGeoExplorer 3 data collbutton from a screen, usand then pressE
243
ation or messages that may orntal line(s). The fields shown are
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
Message boxesA message box appears in some screens. It shows useful informmay not be separated from other data on the screen by a horizoread-only. They cannot be changed or edited.
Messagebox
244
ts, the GeoExplorer 3 provides aailable in the GeoExplorer 3 datas.
eful information about the item
the list, one page at a time.
list.
ate feature list, as shown in thest displays all features stored ina file. To select an item from arow keys to highlight the item
.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
ListsWhen selecting data files, data dictionaries, features, or waypoinlist. A list contains the information that is currently stored and avcollection system. A list always has a title that describes the item
A message box is often displayed below the list and provides uscurrently highlighted.
To close a list press e .
Press f1 or f5 to move the highlight up or down
Press f2 or f4 to move to the first or last item in the
This is the Updtitle bar. This lithe current datlist, use the arand press E
Title bar
Message box
245
ical fashion. If you position thehighlight moves to the lastlast option and press 5 the
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
NOTE All option lists, sublists, forms, and checklists scroll in a cyclhighlight on the first (top) option in the list and press 1 the(bottom) option. Similarly, if you position the highlight on thehighlight moves to the top option.
246
ace in forms. These are likefields.
lue. A prompt is followed by aator fields, which have no value
being highlighted. Any editinglect it by highlighting it and
se a form to enter information.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
FormsData entry in the GeoExplorer 3 data collection system takes plpaper forms, in that they have a title and a sequence of lines or
Each field generally has two parts, a prompt (or name) and a vacolon (:) that separates it from the value. Some fields are separand serve simply to divide a form into sections.
One field in every form is the current field. It is distinguished byoperations on a form apply to the current field. To edit a field, sepressing E .
Title
ValuePrompt
Current field
U
247
t as soon as you accept the
page at a time. This isto move to the first or last field in
ished editing a field in the form,ture attribute entry form is open,
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
There are three ways to enter data into a form:
• Text entry
• Numeric entry
• Pop-up list
A form is “live”. When you edit a field, the new value takes effecchange by pressinge.
Press f1 or f5 to move up or down the form, oneequivalent to page up and page down. Usef2 orf4the form. This is equivalent to Home and End.
When you have finished browsing through the form, or have finpresse to return to the previous screen or list. When a feayou can also press fe to abandon the feature.
248
rmware you can press thewhen the Chart tab is active. The
bar appears on the right. Use
the option list, one page at an in the list. To close an option
ent option in a list is highlighted.a different option, press1 orove the highlight and then press
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
Option listsOption lists display additional functions. In some places in the fim key to display the options. For example, pressmfollowing options appear:
If an option list has more options than fit on one screen, a scroll1 or 5 to scroll up and down the list.
Press f1 or f5 to move the highlight up or downtime. Press f2 orf4 to move to the first or last optiolist press m again, or press e .
CurrentThe currTo select5 to mE .
option
Optionlist
Scrollbar
249
. For example, if you select thelist appears:
the sublist, one page at a time.sublist. To close a sublist, press
urrent option in a sublist isghted. To select a different, press1 or5 to move the
ght and then press E .
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
SublistsSome options open into a sublist. A sublist relates to that optionFilter option from the Update feature option list, the Filter by sub
Press f1 or f5 to move the highlight up or downUsef2 orf4 to move to the first or last option in thee .
Update feature
Current
Filter by
Filter
The chighlioptionhighli
option
sublist
option list
250
Scroll bar
Checklisttitle
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
ChecklistsSome option lists open into a checklist. Ifyou select Info windows from the Roadoption list, for example, the Info windowschecklist appears:
To select an item in a checklist, use thearrow keys to highlight it and then pressE . When it is selected a✓ appears in the box on the left. To cleara ✓ , use the arrow keys to highlight theitem and pressE . The ✓ isremoved.
To close a checklist and save yourchanges, presse . To cancel anychanges, pressfe .
251
s up”. When the GeoExplorer 3ops up with two buttons, one ofTo do this, press 2 or 4 toen press E .
for Yes/No questions.
ample of a pop-up message.essages should be noted,
t information about the task you
creen, presse.
Explorer 3 messages.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
Pop-up messagesOccasionally, a message “popasks a question, a message pwhich you select in response.highlight your response and th
TIP Presse to select No
The Error screen is another exWarning! and Error! mbecause they contain importanare trying to perform.
To clear a message from the s
For more information, see Geo
252
end on the type of data to be
ch attribute in the data dictionary.es, or you can use thee the default value.
incrementing attributes. Eachlue that is calculated by
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
Data entryThere are three ways to enter data. The methods available depentered:
• Text entry
• Numeric entry
• Pop-up list
To save time on data entry, a default value can be defined for eaYou can either accept the default value that the system generatappropriate data entry method for that attribute to edit or replac
In addition, text and numeric attributes can be defined as Auto-new instance of an auto-incrementing attribute has a default vaincreasing or decreasing the last value by a specified amount.
253
d contains the following:
• Function bar
ress m to view theption list.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
Text entryYou can enter text using the text entry field.
Use the Edit bar and characters to enter text. The text entry fiel
• Attribute/Field name • Edit bar
• Characters • Close bar
Attribute/Field name
Function bar
Characters
Edit bar
Close bar
CursorPO
254
ibute or field.cursor flashes to indicate its
rs to the left of the cursor. Tohighlight the BKSP !!!!
.
the Edit bar. Use the arrow keysand then pressE .
characters from uppercase tothe arrow keys to highlight the
.
plete the text value byt match the text entered so far.
he Matches function, whichtrings. PressE to displayrings, highlight a string, andrt this string in the Edit bar.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
Use this area … to …Attribute/Field name view the name of the selected attrEdit bar enter or change the text value. The
current location in the Edit bar.Function bar • Use BKSP !!!! to delete characte
backspace use the arrow keys tofunction and then press E
• Use SPACE to insert a space into highlight the SPACE function
• Use the A➜➜➜➜ a function to changelowercase (and vice versa). UseA➜➜➜➜ a function and then pressE
• Use the Matches function to comselecting from a list of strings thaUse the arrow keys to highlight tshows the number of matching sa Pop-up list of the matching stthen press E again to inse
255
ntry. To insert a character inhighlight the desired
any changes. To save thekeys to highlight Close (atpress E . You can also
e form to save the new text. To cancel any changes ande .
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
Characters select the characters for the text ethe Edit bar, use the arrow keys tocharacter and then press E .
Close bar close the text entry field and saveentry in the Edit bar, use the arrowthe bottom of the keypad) and thenpress e from anywhere in thand go to back to the previous formrestore the original value, press f
Use this area … to …
256
• Text completion
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
Option list
Press m , from the text entry field, to view the options.
The options are:
• Clear • Change style
257
ly entered in the Edit bar.that you can select. Choose
ilable when you are entering
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
Use this option... to …Clear clear (delete) the text that is currentChange style change the layout of the characters
from ABCDEF and QWERTY.Text completion enable or disable Text completion.
NOTE Text completion is only avaor editing attribute values.
258
d up data entry by using the textxplorer 3 data collection system
e text strings you have enteredom the GPS Pathfinder Office
Edit bar with the matching textrrent attribute. Strings are rankedtered so far, the one you used
g
sible matches
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
Text completion
When you are entering or editing attribute values, you can speecompletion function. When text completion is enabled, the GeoEcompares the text you have entered so far against a list of all thpreviously, and all the attribute values in data files transferred frsoftware.
If a match is found, the system fills in the rest of the string in thefrom the list. The list contains all the possible matches for the cuby age, so if more than one string matches the text you have enmore recently is the one that is suggested.
Matching strinEntered textNumber of pos
259
ter, pressf4 to accept theEdit bar. You can still edit the text
enter, delete it by either selecting
strings in the list match the textss E, an alphabeticalfrom the list and pressE toop-up list without selecting a
atch is highlighted in the list ofs.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
If the suggested text is correct, or close to the text you want to ensuggested text and move the cursor to the end of the text in thethat is displayed after you have accepted the suggested text.
If the suggestion is not sufficiently similar to the text you want toBKSP !!!! and pressingE, or entering another character.
The Matches function in the function bar shows you how manyyou have entered so far. If you select this function and then prepop-up list of the matches appears. You can then select a stringinsert it into the Edit bar, or you can press e to close the pstring.
The predicted mpossible matche
260
matches, highlight it in the list,elected string is removed from
ar all strings from the list.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
If a string that you want to remove appears in the pop-up list ofpress m to display the option list, and select Delete. The sthe list and will no longer be matched to any text you enter.
TIP Use the Reset text list option in the Setup tab’s Reset list to cle
261
nter data.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
Numeric entryThere are two types of numeric entry fields into which you can e
• Single numeric entry
• Multiple option numeric entry
262
try, a field similar to this appears:
s highlighted press1 or5 tot of each other. Press E tobecomes the new value for thentry “field” and save changes. Toged it) press fe .
ll is 9, press 1 to change thege the value to 9.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
Single numeric entry
When you select a numeric field that requires single numeric en
It contains a title, units and numeric cells.
To enter a value, press2 or4 to highlight a cell. When a cell iscroll the value in the cell from 0 to 9. The cells are independensave the new value. When you pressE the value enteredselected field. You can also presse to close the numeric ecancel changes and restore the original value (before you chan
NOTE The cells scroll in a circular fashion. When the value in the cevalue to 0. When the value in the cell is 0, press 5 to chan
Title
Units
Cell
263
d similar to one of these appears:
umeric cells, and three options.ption has a highlighted radiorn is the selected option.
e corresponding radio button is
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
Multiple option numeric entry
When you select a numeric field that has multiple options, a fiel
In the Warning distance field shown here, there is a title, units, nEach option has a corresponding “radio button”. The selected obutton surrounded by a shaded box. In this example, Always wa
To change the option that is selected, press 1 or5 until thhighlighted.
Cell
Title
Units
“Radio button”
Options
Title
Selectedoption
264
ighlight a numeric cell. When youutton disappears to indicate that5 to scroll the number in thathe cells are independent of each
the value of the selectede to close the numeric
fore your changes), press
e cell is 9, press1 to changehange the value to 9.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
To change the value for the selected option, press2 or4 to hhighlight a cell, the shaded box around the corresponding radio ba numeric cell is selected. With a cell highlighted, press 1 orcell from 0 through 9. To move between cells, press2 or4. Tother. Press E to save the new setting. When you pressEoption becomes the new value for the field. You can also pressentry field and save changes.
To cancel changes and restore values to the original setting (befe .
NOTE Values in a cell scroll in a cyclical way. When the value in ththe value to 0. When the value in the cell is 0, press5 to c
265
p list appears:
rent value, press 1 or5 to
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
Pop-up listWhen you select a field that has many possible values, a pop-u
The current value in a pop-up list is highlighted. To select a diffemove the highlight and then press E .
Field name
List of values forthe selected field
266
bar appears on the right. Use
light on the first (top) value in) value. Similarly, if you
, the highlight moves to thelast option in the list.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
If a pop-up list has more options than fit on one screen, a scroll1 or 5 to scroll up and down the list.
NOTE A pop-up list scrolls in a cyclical way. If you position the highthe list and press 1, the highlight moves to the last (bottomposition the highlight on the last value in the list and press 5top value. Press f2 or f4 to move to the first or
Scroll bar
267
ta collection system, you can setathfinder Office software toinformation, refer to the GPS
ettings to be changed. If youe settings to be altered, lock
ears in the Status bar.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
Password controlTo lock configuration settings and tasks on the GeoExplorer 3 daa password. Use the Configuration Manager utility in the GPS Pindicate which configuration settings and tasks to lock. For morePathfinder Office Help.
Locking and unlocking is useful when you do not want certain screate a configuration for a certain job and you do not want somthem by applying a password.
When configuration settings or tasks are locked, a lock icon app
Lock icon
268
ld value as well as in the status
.) You are prompted to enterrd, the field unlocks and you can
data collection system remains
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
When a field is locked, the lock icon appears to the left of the fiebar.
To edit a locked field, select it. (Highlight the field and pressEthe password, using Text entry. If you enter the correct passwoedit the field.
NOTE If a configuration setting or task is locked, the GeoExplorer 3password locked when turned off.
Lock icon in field
Lock icon in status bar
269
etting, you can remove the lock.this, pressm from the top
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation
Re-lock optionIf you need to make changes to a locked task or configuration sTo prevent further changes, lock the field again afterwards. To dolevel of The Setup tab (the Select screen) and select Re-lock.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference 270
SYS section – Introduction
THE SYS SECTIONTHE SYS SECTIONTHE SYS SECTIONTHE SYS SECTIONUse the SYS section to view GPS satellite information, check your current position, check thehardware status, and determine the quality of the GPS signal being received. Use it to configurethe GeoExplorer 3 data collection system settings, create or edit data dictionaries, and alterfeature settings.
Press s to move between the tabs in the SYS section. They are:
• The GPS tab • The Status tab • The Setup tab
271
e. The Standard mode screen
PS status. It contains:
• Signal strength
e GPS tab to view informationthe satellites that thexplorer 3 is tracking, and theire positions.
m to view theced mode.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 12: The GPS tab
12121212 The GPS tabThe GPS tabThe GPS tabThe GPS tabs / GPS
To display the GPS tab, press s until the GPS tab is activappears:
The Standard mode of the GPS tab is a graphical view of the G
• Skyplot • Current GPS position
• Satellite geometry
Skyplot
SignalUse thaboutGeoErelativ
PressAdvan
strength
Current
Satellitegeometry
position
272
atellites available to the receiver:
represents the configuredr circle of the skyplot movesets smaller and only thoseIf the elevation mask ise horizon are used to compute
k
r
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 12: The GPS tab
SkyplotThe skyplot provides a graphical display of the position of the s
The outer circle represents the horizon (at 0° ). The inner circleElevation mask. When the elevation mask is changed, the inneaccordingly. If the elevation mask is increased, the inner circle gsatellites higher in the sky are used to compute GPS positions.decreased, the inner circle gets larger and satellites closer to thGPS positions.
Skyplot
Horizon
Elevation mas
North indicato
Satellitesoverhead
273
he GeoExplorer 3 data collectionthe sky (overhead), while thosee satellite can be determined by
e skyplot.
xes are currently being used byte GPS positions. Satellites withd, but are not being used towith no boxes are available, butGeoExplorer 3.
mpass) to indicate what directionin.
or faster, or if you haveCalibration.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 12: The GPS tab
Numbered boxes represent the satellites currently available to tsystem. The satellites near the center of the circle are higher intoward the edge are closer to the horizon. The location of any onnoting its direction (N, S, E, W) and approximate elevation in th
Satellites shown as black bothe GeoExplorer 3 to compuclear boxes are being trackecompute positions. Satellitesare not being tracked by the
The skyplot rotates (like a cothe GeoExplorer 3 is pointing
NOTE The skyplot only rotates if you are moving at walking speedcalibrated the internal digital compass. For more details, see
274
. It displays the coordinates,
nate system and datum. If thenfiguration use the Coordinates
, open a data file and start a
plorer 3 searches the sky fornals. It then determines which topute the current GPS position,e configured GPS settings. Ther 3 needs a minimum of fourcompute GPS positions.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 12: The GPS tab
Current GPS positionThe current GPS position is shown at the bottom of the GPS tabaltitude, and datum:
Values are displayed in terms of the currently configured coordidatum name is too long, it appears truncated. To change this coform.
For more information, see Coordinate systems.
NOTE Positions viewed on the screen are not saved. To save themfeature, or create a waypoint.
The GeoExsatellite siguse to combased on thGeoExploresatellites to
Altitude and datumCoordinates
275
ully computing GPS positions, aof the screen.
atellites and to calculate theosition.
splayed once per second.
e computed, look formight be blocking satelliteay from any possiblee GeoExplorer 3 is still not
ons, see Potential problems.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 12: The GPS tab
Message boxWhen the GeoExplorer 3 data collection system is not successfdescriptive message appears in the message box at the bottom
When you turn the GeoExplorer 3 on, it begins to track visible scurrent position. It takes up to 45 seconds to calculate the first p
Once the first position is displayed, subsequent positions are di
TIP If no positions arobstructions thatsignals. Move awobstructions. If thcomputing positi
276
satellites are available, twoges indicate that the GPSatellites to compute a new one.
the number below the satelliteen when the GPS tab is not
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 12: The GPS tab
If the GeoExplorer 3 stops computing positions because too fewwarning messages alternate in the message box. These messaposition displayed is an old position and that there are too few s
NOTE When there are too few satellites to compute GPS positions,icon in the Status bar flashes. This icon is always visible, evactive.
277
e geometry is poor, two warningate that the GPS position
es is poor.
in the Status bar flashes. This
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 12: The GPS tab
If the GeoExplorer 3 stops computing positions because satellitmessages alternate in the message box. These messages indicdisplayed is an old position and that the geometry of the satellit
NOTE When the geometry of the satellites is poor, the satellite iconicon is always visible, even when the GPS tab is not active.
For more information, see Satellite geometry.
278
e signal quality of each satelliteof a satellite must be sufficienta satellite with a signal strengthsatellite that is not being used toured minimum level.)
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 12: The GPS tab
Signal strengthThe signal strength bar graph is a graphical representation of ththat the GeoExplorer 3 is currently tracking. The signal strengthbefore it can be used by a GPS receiver. A black bar representsabove the configured minimum level. An empty bar represents acompute GPS positions. (The signal strength is below the config
To change the minimum level, use the GPS slider bar.
Strengthof signalbar graph
Minimumlevel
279
el on the indicator is high. Ifmputed positions is reduced. The
Explorer 3 stops computing GPSTo change it, use the GPS slider
Level of qualityMinimum level
Satellite geometryindicator
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 12: The GPS tab
Satellite geometryThe satellite geometry indicator is agraphical representation of the overallquality of the GPS positionscomputed.
The quality of the computed positionsis a function of the geometry of thevisible satellites (how they arepositioned in the sky relative to eachother). When the satellites are wellspaced, and cover a large portion ofthe sky, the GeoExplorer 3 datacollection system is able to compute accurate positions. The levsatellites are grouped together in the sky, the accuracy of the colevel on the indicator is low.
When the level of quality falls below the minimum level, the Geopositions. The minimum level accepted is a configurable value.bar.
280
elect Advanced mode.
on:
PDOP mask.
lev
lmanac
en to view information abouttext. The message box at the
screen displays Almanacnd the current PDOP.
the Standard mode, pressselect Standard mode.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 12: The GPS tab
Advanced modes / GPS / m / Advanced mode
To display the GPS tab in Advanced mode, press m and s
Advanced mode of the GPS tab displays the following informati
NOTE Use the GPS slider bar to configure the elevation, SNR, and
• PRN • SNR • E
• Br(T) or Br(M) • PDOP • A
Use this scresatellites asbottom of theinformation a
To return tom and
Message box
281
ite. This number is used tollite is currently being used by✓ appears to the left of the
tellite. The signal strength of antent of the signal, relative totellite at 30° elevation isPS position is degraded if theellation falls below 4.0.lets you set the SNR mask.e signal strength of a satellitethe GPS receiver. If aR mask, that satellite is not
althy” by the GPS Controlppear in the SNR column for
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 12: The GPS tab
This column... lists...PRN the pseudorandom number of each satell
uniquely identify each satellite. If the satethe GeoExplorer 3 to compute positions, aPRN.
SNR the current signal-to-noise ratio of each sasatellite is a measure of the information cothe signal’s noise. The typical SNR of a sabetween 10.0 and 15.0. The quality of a GSNR of one or more satellites in the constThe GeoExplorer 3 data collection systemThis value is used to determine whether this sufficient for that satellite to be used bysatellite’s SNR is below the configured SNused to compute positions.
NOTE If a satellite is marked as “unheSegment, the characters “U/H” athat satellite.
282
each satellite. A satellite thatnot used to compute
bearing is shown relative to), as determined by the
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 12: The GPS tab
Elev the current elevation above the horizon ofis below the configured Elevation mask ispositions.
Br(T) or Br(M) the current bearing to each satellite. Thiseither true north (T) or magnetic north (Mcurrently configured North reference.
This column... lists...
283
ction of the geometry of the GPStellites are well separated in themore satellites are closeerent in measuring their signals
with GPS. These factors give anstem (GPS). DOP factors arebest. The best overall indicatorn, or PDOP.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 12: The GPS tab
PDOPThe accuracy of a position computed by a GPS receiver is a funconstellation visible at that moment in time. When the visible sasky, the GPS receiver can compute accurate positions. If two ortogether at the time the position is recorded, the small errors inhcompound, reducing the accuracy of computed positions.
There are several Dilution of Precision (DOP) factors associatedindication of the expected accuracy of the Global Positioning Sylinear multipliers on the expected error, so a small DOP value isof satellite constellation geometry is Position Dilution of Precisio
284
shows how PDOP values are
mask as an upper limit on PDOPcy, and makes sure that thes above this mask, the
by the satellite icon in the
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 12: The GPS tab
The PDOP value is a measure of positional accuracy. This tablecategorized.
The GeoExplorer 3 lets you specify a PDOP mask. It uses thisvalues. You can configure the desired level of positional accurapositions logged are of a certain quality. When the PDOP climbGeoExplorer 3 stops computing GPS positions. This is indicatedStatus bar.
PDOP level Quality1 to 4 Excellent4 to 6 Good6 to 8 Fair8 to 12 Poor12 to 100 Very poor100 and above Unusable
285
over a moderately long period ofation and information about ther time). The GeoExplorer 3 uses
new almanac. It can collect an
f the Advanced mode screenate of the current almanac. Ifed instead of the almanac date,Explorer 3 has not yet collectedlmanac.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 12: The GPS tab
AlmanacAn almanac is a set of data that is used to predict satellite orbitstime, usually about a month. The almanac contains clock informorbital path for each satellite (where it is in the sky at a particulait to get a lock on satellites.
The GeoExplorer 3 takes approximately 15 minutes to collect aalmanac and compute positions at the same time.
An almanac is required by Trimble’s Quick Plan software.
For more information, refer to the GPS Pathfinder Office Help.
The bottom odisplays the dN/A is displaythen the Geoa complete a
Almanac date
286
tab
ctive. It appears in Standard
rmation about theccessories, and external
tatus tab in DGPS mode.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 13: The Status
13131313 The Status tabThe Status tabThe Status tabThe Status tabs / Status
To display the Status tab, press s until the Status tab is amode.
In Standard mode, the Status tab displays:
• Hardware
• Accessories and external connections
Use this screen to view infoGeoExplorer 3 hardware, aconnections.
You can also display the S
287
tab
hown on the inside of the
Number of files to transfer
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 13: The Status
HardwareInformation about the status of the GeoExplorer 3 hardware is sGeoExplorer 3 diagram.
This screen displays the following hardware information:
• Memory gauge • Power level •
Number ofkilobytes free
Number offiles totransfer
Powerremaining Power gauge
Memorygauge
288
tab
rtion of the GeoExplorer 3ailable. The lower the level onilable. The higher the level onable. The number of kilobytes
indicated by the power gaugesplayed on the bottom right ofe level on the gauge, the moreel, the less internal powerwer is indicated on the left of
an office computer is indicatedgram. This number indicates
that have not been transferredstem to an office computer.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 13: The Status
Display DescriptionMemory gauge The memory gauge is shown in the top po
diagram. It shows the level of memory avthe gauge, the more memory there is avathe gauge, the less memory there is avail(KB) free is also displayed.
Power level The amount of internal power remaining isand a percentage. The power gauge is dithe GeoExplorer 3 diagram. The higher thinternal power remains. The lower the levremains. The percentage of remaining pothe power gauge.
Number of filesto transfer
The number of files not yet transferred toin the bottom left of the GeoExplorer 3 diathe number of data files, base and rover,from the GeoExplorer 3 data collection sy
289
tab
l
tions is shown in the four panels
• Power
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 13: The Status
Accessories and externaconnectionsInformation about accessories and the status of external connecsurrounding the GeoExplorer 3 diagram.
This screen displays the following information:
• Real-time • Antenna • Transfer
Real-time
Power
Antenna
Transfer
290
tab
nding on how thenfigured, one of five icons or
he GeoExplorer 3 data collectionover the cable-free link.
hen connected to the, the current status of the BoB isle states are Locked, Tracking,quency being tracked or locked
con. The histogram on the left ofl-to-noise ratio) of the differentiald. If the differential GPS beaconen the frequency that it ised, and the SNR histogram is
GeoExplorer 3 data collectionover the cabled link.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 13: The Status
This panel … shows …Real-time the current real-time position status. Depe
GeoExplorer 3 data collection system is comessages is displayed:
Cable-free BoB – Indicates that tsystem is using the BoB receiver
Cabled and Cable-free BoB – WBeacon-on-a-Belt (BoB) receiverindicated in the panel. The possibSearching, or Idle. The current freonto is displayed below the BoB ithe icon indicates the SNR (signaGPS beacon signal being receiveis not locked onto a frequency, thcurrently trying to track is displayempty.
Cabled BoB – Indicates that thesystem is using the BoB receiver
291
tab
Explorer 3 is using an external
Explorer 3 is not receiving
that there are not enoughtions. Without a GPS position, ite position.
at the geometry of the satellitesis not generated.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 13: The Status
Real-time(continued)
This panel … shows …
Other – Indicates that the Georadio for real-time corrections.
None – Indicates that the Georeal-time corrections.
Too few satellites – Indicatessatellites to compute GPS posiis not possible to get a real-tim
Too fewsatellites
Poor geometry – Indicates this poor, so a real-time position
Poorgeometry
292
tab
oExplorer 3 is using the internal
e GeoExplorer 3 is using the
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 13: The Status
Antenna the type of antenna in use.This panel … shows …
Built-in – Indicates that the Geantenna.
Built-in
Connected – Indicates that thexternal antenna.
293
tab
ossible states:
Explorer 3 is not sending or
– Indicates that thean office computer. Movementof the transfer indicates thatssage OK appears above ther is complete, File Errorwas unsuccessful. The number
ed is indicated on the bottom of
oExplorer 3 is outputting NMEA
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 13: The Status
Transfer the data transfer status. There are three pThis panel … shows …
IDLE – Indicates that the Georeceiving data.
IDLE
Connected and transferringGeoExplorer 3 is connected toalong the cable in the directiondata is being transferred. A metransfer icon when data transfeindicates that the data transferof bytes successfully transferrthis icon.
NMEA – Indicates that the Gemessages.
294
tab
e type of power source, one of
eoExplorer 3 is using the
sing an external power source.
connected to an external power
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 13: The Status
Power the type of power source. Depending on ththree icons is displayed:
This panel … shows …
Internal – Indicates that the Ginternal power source.
Internal
External – Indicates that it is u
Charging – Indicates that it issource and is charging.
295
tab
select DGPS mode:
• Beacon mode
• Input level
• BoB receiver battery level
cted to the BoB receiver to viewB and GeoExplorer 3 in a
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 13: The Status
DGPS modes / Status / m / DGPS mode
To display the Status tab in the DGPS mode, press m and
In DGPS mode, the Status tab displays information about:
• DGPS status • Frequency
• SNR • Error rate
• Last RTCM • Beacon state
• Filter applied
Use this screen when connethe real-time status of the Botext-based format.
296
tab
al-time corrected positions.
WBFFT – When ther real-time corrections, one ofs. Each value describes the
nel. Locked indicates that
a radio source rather than the
ating real-time corrected
gh satellites to compute GPS
satellites is too poor.
OK or None, the other fields
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 13: The Status
Field DescriptionDGPS status Whether the GeoExplorer 3 is receiving re
There are five states:
• Locked / Tracking / Searching / Idle /GeoExplorer 3 uses the BoB receiver fothese values appears in the DGPS statustatus of the BoB receiver primary chancorrections are being received.
• RTCM OK –The GeoExplorer 3 is usingBoB receiver for real-time corrections.
• None – The GeoExplorer 3 is not generpositions.
• Too few satellites – There are not enoupositions.
• Poor geometry – The geometry of the
NOTE When the DGPS status is RTCMshow N/A.
297
tab
is being tracked/locked onto.3.5 kHz and 325 kHz.ode it will track the best
uencies if its current frequency
mode it will track oneency unless you alter the
cibels (dB), of the differential6.0 indicates that the signal is
umber of RTCM words withtion. An error rate of below 0.1
field, measured in decibels. An input level betweenble.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 13: The Status
Frequency The current frequency of the satellite thatThe available frequencies are between 28
Beacon mode Best – when the BoB receiver is in Best mfrequency that it can, and will change freqbecomes unsatisfactory.Fixed – when the BoB receiver is in Fixedfrequency and will not alter from this frequfrequency manually on the BoB receiver.
SNR The signal-to-noise ratio, measured in deGPS beacon frequency. An SNR of aboveusable.
Error rate The RTCM Word Error Rate. This is the nparity errors, expressed as a decimal fracis acceptable.
Input level The intensity level of the electro-magneticabove one microvolt per meter (dBµ V/M)10 dBµ V/M and 100 dBµ V/M is accepta
Field Description
298
tab
lds will appear as N/A.
seconds) since the lastExplorer 3. By default, theer correction values yield
BoB receiver. Possibleonitored. The BoB receiverth a healthy signal.ys the remaining batterya percentage.a filter has been applied to the
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 13: The Status
NOTE If the BoB receiver is not the real-time source then these fie
Last RTCM The Last RTCM field indicates the time (inRTCM message was received by the GeoRTCM age limit is set to 50 seconds. Newgreater precisions than older values.
Beacon state The health of the signal received from thesettings are Healthy, Unhealthy, and Unmcan be configured to use only beacons wi
BoB receiverbattery level
The BoB receiver battery level field displapower of the BoB receiver, expressed as
Filter applied The Filter applied field indicates whetherfrequency list on the BoB receiver.
Field Description
299
ab
tive. The Select screen appears:
• Feature settings
ate and edit data dictionaries,to edit the configuration. You
xplorer 3 data collectionfaults and find out about the
ght it and pressE.
the Re-lock option.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
14141414 The Setup tabThe Setup tabThe Setup tabThe Setup tabs / Setup
To display the Setup tab, press s until the Setup tab is ac
The buttons are:
• Configurations • Data dictionaries
• About • Reset
Use the Setup tab to creedit feature settings, andcan also reset the GeoEsystem to the factory deunit.
To select a button, highli
Pressm to display
300
ab
ets the parameters thatunicated to external devices.
on screen appears.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Configurationss / Setup / Configurations
Select the Configurations button to edit the configuration. This sdetermine how data is collected, entered, displayed, and comm
Select Configurations from the Setup tab. The Edit configurati
301
ab
iguration form appears:
• Real-time
• Formats
a configuration form to viewsome critical configurations
r example, GPS is a criticalo set non-criticalapplication or preferences.
Edit configuration screen.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Edit configurations / Setup / Configurations
The Edit configuration screen displays configuration buttons:
When you select a configuration button, the corresponding conf
• Data • GPS
• Coordinates • Units
• COMMS • Other
Use this screen to selector edit. You can configurebefore collecting data. Foconfiguration. You can alsconfigurations to suit your
Press e to close the
302
ab
ata form appears:
• Log velocities
• Warning distance
gure how the data is collected.
e GeoExplorer 3 pops up aor prompts you to enter data.
Data form.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Datas / Setup / Configurations / Data
Select the Data button from the Edit configuration screen. The D
These fields are available in the Data form:
• Log between features • Log PPRT data
• Antenna height • Allow GPS update
• Filename prefix
Use the Data form to confi
When you select a field, thlist of entries for that field,
Press e to close the
303
ab
Default valuePS positionsovides a traildatas is a
rval in time or
ata collectionnless apositionsrefer to.
be referredin the GPSother Trimble
Off
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Use this field … to …Log betweenfeatures
specify a logging interval for recording Gwhen you are between features. This prthat shows where you travelled during acollection session. (Log between featureNumeric entry field. Set the logging intedistance units.)
NOTE By default, the GeoExplorer 3 dsystem does not log positions ufeature is selected. To log GPSwhen a feature is not selected,Advanced datalogging optionsPositions between features mayto as “Not in feature” positionsPathfinder Office software anddatalogging software.
304
ab
s real-timestprocessns from ayou need tong real-timehe real-time
differentialthe office.
r accuracy.
NoDefault value
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Log PPRT data log the extra data needed to postprocesdata when you return to the office. To poreal-time data using differential correctiosource other than that used in the field,log extra information. This postprocessi(PPRT) information is used to prepare tdata for postprocessing. Then, using thecorrections, the data is postprocessed inThe PPRT data can provide even greateThe items in the Pop-up list are:
• Yes
• No
Use this field … to …
305
ab
a. Logdata inthese areo eliminate
No
enna heightthe featureumeric entry
1.00 m
Default value
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Log velocities select whether or not to log velocity datvelocities when you are collecting GPSmultipath conditions. Back in the office,then used during differential correction tthe effects of multipath.The items in the pop-up list are:
• Yes
• NoAntenna height enter the height of the antenna. The ant
is the height of the GPS antenna aboveyou are collecting. Antenna height is a Nfield.
Use this field … to …
306
ab
n be updatedare:
e you can loglaces theature.
you cannoton stored for, but not the
Yes
e originalthis distanceample, au try to log
5 m away, a warningtry field.
Always warn
Default value
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Allow GPSupdate
specify whether or not positional data ca(replaced). The items in the Pop-up list
• Yes – When you are updating a featurnew GPS positions. This new data reppositional information stored for the fe
• No – When you are updating a featureupdate (replace) the position informatithat feature. You can update attributesposition(s).
Warningdistance
specify the warning distance between thfeature and your current position. Whenis exceeded, a warning appears. For exwarning distance of 5 m means that if yoGPS positions when you are more thanfrom the existing position for the featuremessage appears. This is a Numeric en
Use this field … to …
307
ab
you record.hthe file namee it was
iles. Thealways “B”.
RDefault value
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Filename prefix specify a single letter to identify the filesThis is the first letter of the name of eacautomatically generated file. The rest ofis generated using the date and UTC timcreated. This is a Text entry field.
NOTE This field does not affect base ffilename prefix for base files is
Use this field … to …
308
ab
PS slider bar appears:
ghted cell represents the current
ation changes accordingly. Asas a filter that accepts positions
etting is adjusted.
slider bar to configure thelity) required for GPS positions.isplay the GPS slider bar inde.
to close the GPS slider bar.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
GPSs / Setup / Configurations / GPSSelect the GPS button from the Edit configuration screen. The G
The GPS slider bar has nine settings from Low to High. A highlisetting.
To change the GPS slider bar setting, press 2 or 4. The animyou move the setting from High to Low, the GPS slider bar actsthat are less precise.
NOTE A change to the GPS slider bar takes effect as soon as the s
Slider
Animated
9
1Use the GPSprecision (quaYou can also dAdvanced mo
Presse
bar
symbol
Currentsetting
309
ab
r 3 data collection system filtersel of quality. Use a high setting
l of quality is lower. Thetting to collect more positions,
tree canopy can obstruct yours to be recorded. Some positionsmeans that there are fewer gapsof the positions collected is high,e to map the entire area.
sents the current GPS slider bares to indicate that the tolerance
t you configure the slider bar to
flashes to warn that the satellitellite geometry. Alternatively, stayadjust the GPS slider bar.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
When the GPS precision is set to a high value, the GeoExploreout, and will not use, positions that do not meet the specified levwhen a project requires high precision.
When the GPS precision is set to a low value, the specified leveGeoExplorer 3 does not filter as many positions. Use a lower seincluding those that are slightly less precise.
If you are working on a project in a forest area, for example, theview of the sky. Adjust the GPS slider bar to allow more positionmay be of a lower quality, but the increased number of positionsin the data collected. If the setting is too high, and the precisionpositions may not be collected as often and you may not be abl
At the bottom of the screen is an animation that graphically represetting. As the setting moves from High to Low, the circle enlargfor accepting positions lessens.
NOTE This GPS setting is a critical parameter so it is important thasuit the environment.
TIP If you are collecting data and the satellite icon in the Status bargeometry is bad, try changing your position to improve the satewhere you are and wait for the satellite geometry to improve, or
310
ab
and select Advanced mode.
GPS fields instead of an
• Elevation mask
ider bar to configure ther quality required for GPS
Custom check box to use theption.
to change back to Standard
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Advanced mode
s / Setup / Configurations / GPS / mTo display the Advanced mode of the GPS slider bar, press m
Advanced mode is similar to Standard mode, but it displays theanimation. The following fields are shown:
• PDOP mask • SNR mask
• Minimum satellites • 2D altitude
Use the slprecision opositions.
Select theCustom o
Pressmmode.
9
15
Currentsetting
Customcheck box
GPSform
311
ab
this setting, the GPS fieldsar acts as a filter that accepts
ation mask, Minimum satellites,s:
ge a setting in one, this iss the same in the two modes.
Minimumsatellites
2D altitude
4 N/A4 N/A4 N/A4 N/A4 N/A4 N/A4 N/A4 N/A4 N/A
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
To change the slider bar setting, press2 or 4. As you changechange accordingly. As you move from High to Low, the slider bmore or less precise positions.
Each position on the slider bar has a specific PDOP, SNR, Elevand 2D altitude associated with it. This table shows these value
NOTE The Standard and Advanced modes are related. If you chanreflected in the other. The position on the slider bar is alway
Position onslider bar
PDOP mask SNR mask Elevationmask
1 (far left) 20 2 52 12 2.5 103 8 3 124 7 3.5 145 (default) 6 4 156 5.5 4.5 157 5 5 158 4.5 5.5 159 (far right) 4 6 15
312
ab
til the Custom check box is
ove between fields in the GPSte Data entry field appears.
cannot change the mode when
check box is selected, use theigure the parameters that affecte GPS positions.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Custom option
To display the Custom option of the GPS slider bar, press4 unhighlighted.
When the Custom check box is selected, press 1 or5 to mform. To edit a field, select it, and press E. The appropria
Press e to close the Advanced/Custom GPS form.
NOTE The custom option is only available in Advanced mode. Youthe Custom check box is selected.
When the CustomGPS form to confthe precision of th
Customcheck box
GPSform
313
ab
ask, the change is reflected onm level mark on the positionum level mark on the signal
e inner circle on the skyplot.
• Elevation mask
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
NOTE When you adjust the PDOP mask, SNR mask, or elevation mThe GPS tab. The PDOP mask is represented by the minimuquality indicator. The SNR mask is represented by the minimstrength bar graph. The elevation mask is represented by th
These fields are available in the GPS form:
• PDOP mask • SNR mask
• Minimum satellites • 2D altitude
314
ab
Defaultvalue
s this value as anogram a desiredt any positionsP goes above thispositions and the
a Numeric entry
log more positions,usly degraded. It isrimble’s missionhigh PDOP, than to
accuracy of theuring these times.k too far below the
he number of GPSng the precision.
6.0
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Use thisfield …
to …
PDOPmask
specify a PDOP mask. The GeoExplorer 3 useupper limit to the PDOP value. This lets you prlevel of positional accuracy, and make sure thalogged are of a certain precision. When the PDOmask, the GeoExplorer 3 stops computing GPSsatellite icon appears in the Status bar. This isfield.
CAUTION Increasing the PDOP mask lets youbut the quality of these positions may be seriobetter to retain a lower PDOP mask and use Tplanning software to identify the brief times ofcontinue collecting data and compromise thepositions collected. Schedule other activities dConversely, you should not set the PDOP masdefault. A low setting significantly decreases tfeature positions, without significantly increasi
315
ab
ask). This value isof each satellite isS receiver. If amask, it is not usedield.o, see SNR.
oExplorer 3 dataignals. This maye the GPS signal isce GPS precision.
4.0
Defaultvalue
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
SNRmask
specify the signal-to-noise ratio mask (or SNR mused to determine whether the signal strengthsufficient for that satellite to be used by the GPsatellite’s SNR is beneath the configured SNRto compute positions. This is a Numeric entry fFor more information about signal-to-noise rati
CAUTION If you lower the SNR mask, the Gecollection system uses satellites with weaker sincrease GPS coverage in environments wherweakened (such as in forests), but it may redu
Use thisfield …
to …
316
ab
can only useky to compute GPS
r than 15°, givener the elevationnoise associated
ny improvement ineffects ofre used.
for a rover is sete base stationle to each rover. Asce between themes more critical
humb, the differencethe base and the
15°
Defaultvalue
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Elevationmask
specify the elevation mask. The GeoExplorer 3satellites above the specified elevation in the spositions. This is a Numeric entry field.You rarely need to use an elevation mask lowethe number of satellites in service. If you do lowmask, be aware that the increased ionosphericwith satellites low on the horizon will counter aPDOP given by the lower elevation mask. Theionospheric noise increase as lower satellites a
CAUTION Make sure that the elevation maskhigher than that for the base station, so that thalways tracks the same satellites that are visiba rover gets further from the base, the differenelevation mask of the rover and the base becodue to the curvature of the earth. As a rule of tmust be at least 1° for every 100 km betweenrover.
Use thisfield …
to …
317
ab
to compute
s poor and you canlipsoid veryta collection systemwhen it is able to,
to three, it continuesen there are only
onal position, andrucially affected by
e the GeoExplorer 3ition, or the altitude
.tellites to 3, andcant impact on theollection system. Asude you supply ishe horizontalollection system.
4
Defaultvalue
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Minimumsatellites
specify the minimum number of satellites usedpositions. The items in the Pop-up list are:
• 3 – Use this configuration if satellite visibility idetermine your altitude above the WGS-84 elaccurately at all times. The GeoExplorer 3 dauses four satellites to compute GPS positionsbut when the number of visible satellites fallsto compute positions. A position computed whthree usable satellites is called a two-dimensithe accuracy of two-dimensional positions is cthe accuracy of the altitude. You can configurto use the altitude of the last available 3D posthat you have entered in the 2D altitude field
CAUTION If you set the minimum number of saspecify an inaccurate altitude, this has a signifiposition computed by the GeoExplorer 3 data ca rule of thumb, every meter of error in the altitlikely to cause at least three meters of error in tposition computed by the GeoExplorer 3 data c
Use thisfield …
to …
318
ab
vel of accuracy forlection system usesto computemost accurate GPSfour satellites are
positions with an
r phase datasatellites as it canositions are logged
le. This ensures thatsolution. Thisositions.
entally affects thehen you fullychanges.
Defaultvalue
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
• 4 – Use this configuration to achieve a high lelogged positions. The GeoExplorer 3 data colas many satellites as it can (but at least four)positions. This configuration usually yields thepositions and is the most flexible. If more thanavailable, the GeoExplorer 3 computes GPSoverdetermined solution.
• 5 – Use this configuration when doing Carriecollection. The GeoExplorer 3 uses as manyto compute positions. With this setting, GPS ponly if there are at least five satellites availaball logged positions have an overdeterminedconfiguration yields the most accurate GPS p
CAUTION The Minimum satellites field fundamoperation of the GPS receiver. Only modify it wunderstand the consequences of any proposed
Use thisfield …
to …
319
ab
xplorer 3 automatically uses
. You can manuallyfield, or select the
corded is shown at
de relative to the
Use last3D GPS
Defaultvalue
nly available whennumber ofonfigured to 3.nimum number ofet at 4 or 5, the 2Dtomatically set at
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
NOTE If the elevation mask is configured to 4° or below, the GeoE12 channels to receive GPS signals.
2Daltitude
specify the altitude to be used for 2D positionsenter the altitude value using the Numeric entryUse last 3D GPS option. The last 3D altitude rethe bottom of the screen.
NOTE It is important to specify the 2D altituconfigured Altitude reference.
Use thisfield …
to …
This field is othe minimumsatellites is cWhen the misatellites is saltitude is auN/A.
320
ab
The Real-time form appears:
• RTCM age limit
nfigure parameters for collecting
ose the Real-time form.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Real-times / Setup / Configurations / Real-time
Select the Real-time button from the Edit configuration screen.
These fields are available in the Real-time form:
• Mode • Velocity filter
• Station ID
Use this form to codata using RTCM.
Press e to cl
321
ab
Defaultvalue
ecorded. The
positions ifwill be displayed
ve beenrecorded. Theatus bar.
Bestavailable
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Use thisfield …
to …
Mode indicate which positions are displayed and ritems in the Pop-up list are:
• Best available – this uses RTCM correctedavailable, otherwise uncorrected positionsand recorded.
• RTCM only – only GPS positions that hacorrected in real time are displayed andreal-time position icon appears in the St
322
ab
are generated,ilter to removed positions. The
real-time.
all real-timea is set to Yes.
l-time correctedacies to positionsare unsure aboutr multipath in ads that you Logfor use in theal Correctionr to the GPS
Off
Defaultvalue
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Velocity filter smooth real-time corrected positions as theyusing velocity information. Use the velocity fthe effects of multipath on real-time correcteitems in the pop-up list are:
• Off – velocity filtering will not be applied in
• Auto – velocity information is used to filtercorrected positions, unless Log PPRT dat
WARNING Applying the velocity filter to reapositions may introduce inaccurnot affected by multipath. If youwhether or not you will encountefield session, Trimble recommenPPRT data and Log velocitiesGPS Pathfinder Office Differentiutility. For more information, refePathfinder Office Help.
Use thisfield …
to …
323
ab
for which thection (based onnew GPScorrections arent correction is
ected positions.sing thel-time link is
50 s
Defaultvalue
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
RTCM agelimit
specify the RTCM age limit. This is the timereceiver continues to apply a projected correthe most recent correction received) to eachposition that it computes. If no new real-timereceived in the specified time, the most receconsidered too old to provide accurate, corrWhen this occurs, the GPS receiver stops ucorrections, and you are warned that the realost. Items in the Pop-up list are:
Use thisfield …
to …
• 5 s
• 10 s
• 15 s
• 20 s
• 25 s
• 50 s
• 100 s
• 250 s
324
ab
must be ar identifies theta collection
tion. By default,TCM stationstation). This is
Any
Defaultvalue
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Station ID enter a specific RTCM base station ID. Thisnumber between 0 and 1023. The ID numbeRTCM station and lets the GeoExplorer 3 dasystem locate and use a particular base stathe receiver attempts to choose the “best” R(based typically on the distance to the basea Numeric entry field or you can select Any.
Use thisfield …
to …
325
ab
. The Coordinates form appears:
• Datum
• Coordinate units
nfigure parameters that affected and displayed. Specify aion and a map projection to seeand the position of the featuresplayed, in your local coordinates it easy to check your positionmap produced by your GIS.
lose the Coordinates form.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Coordinatess / Setup / Configurations / Coordinates
Select the Coordinates button from the Edit configuration screen
These fields are available in the Coordinates form:
• System • Zone
• Altitude reference • Geoid
• Altitude units
Use this form to cohow data is collectdatum transformatthe GPS position,that you collect dissystem. This makeor navigate using a
Presse to c
326
ab
Defaultvalue
n entering andlay a list of
eoExplorer 3
s to theSystem Managerthe GPS
ransfer coordinateto the
te systems, pressinformation, see
Latitude/Longitude
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Use thisfield …
to …
System specify the coordinate system to be used whedisplaying coordinates. Select this field to dispcoordinate systems currently loaded on the Ghandheld. Items in the Pop-up list are:
• Latitude/Longitude
• Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM)
NOTE To transfer other Coordinate systemGeoExplorer 3, use the Coordinateutility. For more information, refer toPathfinder Office Help. You cannot tsystems from GPS Pathfinder OfficeGeoExplorer 3c edition.
NOTE To reset the list of available coordinam and select Reset. For moreResetting coordinate systems.
327
ab
n calculatingnes that apply tos field. If only oneystem, this field is
N/A
o be used whenected system and
WGS1984
entering andlist are:
MSL
Defaultvalue
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Zone specify the zone (if applicable) to be used whecoordinates. Select this field to display the zothe coordinate system selected in the previouzone is available for the selected coordinate sread-only.
Datum view (and in some cases specify) the datum tcalculating coordinates. Depending on the selzone, this field may be read-only.
Altitudereference
specify the altitude reference to be used whendisplaying altitude values. Items in the Pop-up
• Mean Sea Level (MSL)
• HAE (Height above ellipsoid)
Use thisfield …
to …
328
ab
ting the heightble when thed must beconfigured as then transferring theen creating aSystem ManagerPathfinder Office
Global) model.nsfer
ighlight the geoidhe Delete option.figurations usingA 10x10 geoid.
Global) geoid or a
DMA10x10(Global)
Defaultvalue
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Geoid specify the geoid model to be used for calculaabove mean sea level. This field is only availaselected altitude reference is MSL. Each geoireferenced to a coordinate system for it to becurrent geoid. To do this, specify the geoid whecoordinate system to the GeoExplorer 3 or whcoordinate system export file in the Coordinateutility. (For more information, refer to the GPSHelp.) The supplied geoid is the DMA 10x10 (Use the GPS Pathfinder Office software to traother geoids to the GeoExplorer 3 handheld.
To delete a geoid, select the Geoid field and hyou want to delete. Press m and select tYou are prompted to confirm the deletion. Conthis geoid return to the default setting, the DM
NOTE You cannot delete the DMA 10x10 (geoid that is currently in use.
Use thisfield …
to …
329
ab
s are configured.
er Office software and aplayed by default. If you do not
isplayingther thane:
N/A
isplaying altitude Meters
Defaultvalue
y Ft (sf)
Meters (NAm)
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
NOTE Some fields will display N/A, depending on how related field
NOTE When you transfer a configuration file from the GPS Pathfindcoordinate system is specified, that coordinate system is distransfer the appropriate files, system defaults are displayed.
Coordinateunits
specify the units to be used for entering and dcoordinates when using a coordinate system oLatitude/Longitude. Items in the Pop-up list ar
Altitudeunits
specify the units to be used for entering and dunits. Items in the Pop-up list are:
• Meters (m)
• Feet (ft)
Use thisfield …
to …
• Meters (m)
• Feet (ft)
• Yards (yd)
• US Surve
• Namibian
330
ab
Units form appears:
• Velocity
• Declination
units are to be entered and
its form.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Unitss / Setup / Configurations / Units
Select the Units button from the Edit configuration screen. The
These fields are available in the Units form:
• Distance • Area
• Angle • North reference
Use this form to configure howdisplayed.
Press e to close the Un
331
ab
Default value
ndt are:
Meters
nd Square meters
es (nm)
eters (km2)
s (mi2)
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Use thisfield …
to …
Distance specify the units to be used when entering adisplaying distances. Items in the Pop-up lis
Area specify the units to be used when entering adisplaying area. Items in the Pop-up list are:
• Meters (m)
• Feet (ft)
• Kilometers (km)
• Miles (mi)
• Nautical Mil
• Square meters (m2)
• Square feet (ft2)
• Hectares (Ha)
• Acres (A)
• Square kilom
• Square mile
332
ab
ndare:
Km/Hour
Default value
mph)
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Velocity specify the units to be used when entering adisplaying velocity. Items in the Pop-up list
Use thisfield …
to …
• Meters/Second (m/s)
• Feet/Second (ft/s)
• Km/Hour (kph)
• Miles/Hour (
• Knots (kt)
333
ab
ndp list are:
yed wheny do not
d mode
longitudeslayed in
/or
Degrees
Default value
)
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Angle specify the units to be used when entering adisplaying bearing angles. Items in the Pop-u
NOTE Angle units only affect angles displanavigating and entering offsets. Theaffect:
• the bearings shown in the Advancescreen of the GPS tab.
• the entry or display of latitudes and(which are always entered and dispdegrees with optional minutes andseconds).
Use thisfield …
to …
• Degrees (°)
• Gradians (gon)
• Rhumbs (rh
• Mils (mil)
334
ab
ive toop-up list
background
ompass to
True
a, which iseric entry
significant
lination, oroExplorer 3declination
Auto
Default value
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Northreference
specify whether bearings are displayed relattrue north or magnetic north. Items in the Pare:
• True – useful when navigating relative to amap.
• Magnetic – useful when using a magnetic cnavigate.
Declination specify the magnetic declination for your areprinted on most accurate maps. This is a numfield, or you can select Auto.Items in the pop-up list are:
• Value – enter the declination. If you move adistance, it may be necessary to update thedeclination.
• Auto – if you do not know the magnetic decprefer not to update it as you move, the Geuses an internal database to determine thebased on your current position.
Use thisfield …
to …
335
ab
he Formats form appears:
• Degrees
• Time zone
parameters that affect theplay data.
rmats form.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Formatss / Setup / Configurations / Formats
Select the Formats button from the Edit configuration screen. T
These fields are available in the Formats form:
• Language • Offset
• Date • Time
• Coordinate order
Use this form to configure theformats used to enter and dis
Presse to close the Fo
336
ab
Default value
ith. AExplorer 3.Trimble Web
English
offsets. Horz/Vert
angles thates). Items in
DD°MM'SS.ss"
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Use thisfield …
to …
Language specify the language that you want to work wnumber of languages are loaded on the GeoAdditional languages are available from thesite (www.trimble.com).
Offset specify the format to be used when enteringItems in the Pop-up list are:
• Horz/Vert – horizontal and vertical distance
• Slope/Incl – slope distance and inclinationDegrees specify the format to be used when entering
use degrees (including latitudes and longitudthe Pop-up list are:• DD°MM'SS.ss"
• DD°MM.mmm
• DD°.ddd
337
ab
g the local-up list are:
MM/DD/YYYY
g the local-up list are:
12 hour
Default value
D
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Date specify the format to be used when displayindate in the Time zone field. Items in the Pop
Time specify the format to be used when displayintime in the Time zone field. Items in the Pop
• 12 hour
• 24 hour
Use thisfield …
to …
• DD/MM/YYYY
• MM/DD/YYYY
• YYYY/MM/D
338
ab
Explorer 3try field.
00:00
a position’s Lat/Long(North/East)
Default value
one byalue to
rrect local
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Time zone specify the time zone to be used by the Geodata collection system. This is a Numeric en
Coordinateorder
specify the order to be used when displayingcoordinates. Items in the Pop-up list are:
Use thisfield …
to …
Set the time zadjusting the vdisplay the cotime and date.
• Lat/Long
• Long/Lat
• North/East
• East/North
339
ab
he COMMS form appears:
• NMEA output
• Data bits
eters for communication witht data transfer to and from anication with radios whenor NMEA output messages.
MMS form.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
COMMSs / Setup / Configurations / COMMSSelect the COMMS button from the Edit configuration screen. T
These fields are available in the COMMS form:
• Data transfer • RTCM input
Port settings:
• Input baud rate • Output baud rate
• Stop bits • Parity
Use this form to set the paramexternal devices. These affecoffice computer, and communreceiving real-time corrections
Press e to close the CO
340
ab
Default value
xplorer 3 toe:
be placed inta transfer to
d to the rearcomputerto occur.
disabled.
et to theCM input or
Supportmodule
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Use thisfield …
to …
Datatransfer
specify the device used to connect the GeoEthe office computer. Items in the Pop-up list ar
• Support module – the GeoExplorer 3 mustthe GeoExplorer 3 support module for dathe office computer to occur.
• Serial clip – the Serial clip must be attacheof the GeoExplorer 3 and connected to theusing a null modem cable for data transfer
• Off – data transfer to the office computer is
NOTE The Data transfer field cannot be ssame value as configured in the RTNMEA output fields (except Off).
341
ab
e RTCM
t to the samecept Off).
e optionalEA output
Cable-freeBoBorSerial clip (withGeoExplorer 3cedition)
Default value
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
RTCM input specify the connection device used to receivmessages. Items in the Pop-up list are:
• Cable-free BoB
NOTE This option is not available with theGeoExplorer 3c edition.
• Support module
• Serial clip
• Off
NOTE The RTCM input field cannot be sevalue as the Data transfer field (ex
NOTE When using RTCM input without thRTCM/NMEA splitter cable, the NMmust be set to Off.
Use thisfield …
to …
342
ab
NMEA
et to theld (except
the optionalCM inputB.
Off
Default value
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
NMEAoutput
specify the connection device used to outputmessages. Items in the Pop-up list are:
• Support module
• Serial clip
• Off
NOTE The NMEA output field cannot be ssame value as the Data transfer fieOff).
NOTE When using NMEA output withoutRTCM/NMEA splitter cable, the RTmust be set to Off or Cable-free Bo
Use thisfield …
to …
343
ab
Items in the 2400
Items in the 2400
Default value
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Input baudrate
specify the baud rate for input of RTCM data.pop-up list are:
Output baudrate
specify the baud rate for output NMEA data.Pop-up list are:
Use thisfield …
to …
• 110
• 300
• 600
• 1200
• 2400
• 4800
• 9600
• 19200
• 38400
• 110
• 300
• 600
• 1200
• 2400
• 4800
• 9600
• 19200
• 38400
344
ab
fer data.ent in amit org a singlet and data
8
te the end ofransferred.ent in a
a byte and aThis field iss in the
1
Default value
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Data bits specify the number of data bits used to transWhen data is transferred, each character is sstream of single bits, but many devices transreceive fewer than eight bits when transferrincharacter. This field is the same for data inpuoutput. Items in the pop-up list are:
• 7
• 8Stop bits specify the number of stop bits used to indica
a byte. Stop bits are part of the data that is tWhen data is transferred, each character is sstream of single bits. There are eight bits instop bit is used to indicate the end of a byte.the same for data input and data output. ItemPop-up list are:
• 1
• 2
Use thisfield …
to …
345
ab
ata ishe same
device.output.
None
Default value
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Parity specify the parity used when binary digital dtransferred. For most data transfers, select tparity as is set in the external communicationThis field is the same for data input and dataItems in the pop-up list are:
Use thisfield …
to …
• None
• Even
• Odd
346
ab
Other form appears:
rameters for the beep volume,plorer 3 data collection systems.
Other form.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Others / Setup / Configurations / Other
Select the Other button from the Edit configuration screen. The
These fields are available in the Other form:
• Beep volume • NMEA output interval
NMEA messages:
• GGA • VTG
Use this form to set the paand to configure the GeoExfor NMEA output message
Press e to close the
347
ab
Default value
emits a
e the
On
essages are 5 s
utput in the:
Yes
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Use thisfield …
to …
Beepvolume
specify whether the GeoExplorer 3 handheldbeep. Items in the Pop-up list are:
• On – any warnings or position logging causGeoExplorer 3 to beep.
• Off – the GeoExplorer 3 does not beep.NMEAoutputinterval
specify the output interval at which NMEA mtransmitted. This is a Numeric entry field.
GGA specify if the GGA message string is to be oNMEA message. Items in the pop-up list are
• Yes
• No
348
ab
tput in the:
Yes
Default value
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
VTG specify if the VTG message string is to be ouNMEA message. Items in the Pop-up list are
• Yes
• No
Use thisfield …
to …
349
ab
ne. You can create new dataer 3 data collection system in thete or edit a data dictionary.
tionary list appears:
reated. The most recently
onary, select it from the list. Theppears.
elect data dictionary list.
advanced Data dictionaries
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Data dictionariess / Setup / Data dictionaries
Use this list to edit an existing data dictionary or create a new odictionaries that are specific to different jobs. Use the GeoExplorfield, or the GPS Pathfinder Office software in the office, to crea
Select Data dictionaries from the Setup tab. The Select data dic
NOTE Data dictionaries are listed in the order in which they were ccreated file is at the bottom of the list.
To edit an existing data dictiEdit data dictionary form a
Presse to close the S
Pressm to display theoption list.
350
ab
ailable options.
• Rename
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Data dictionaries option lists / Setup / Data dictionaries / mPress m from the Select data dictionary list to view the av
The options are:
• New • Copy
• Delete
351
ab
u select this option, thedisplays a Text entry field.ary. Press e to save thery form.ata dictionary to be copied.eoExplorer 3 displays a textchange it. The default name
to save the name and
ictionary. Highlight the dataand select Rename. A text
of the data dictionary. Press
ions do not appear if Genericcannot rename or delete the
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Use this option … to …New create a new data dictionary. When yo
GeoExplorer 3 data collection systemEnter the name of the new data dictionname and go to the Edit data dictiona
Copy copy a data dictionary. Highlight the dPress m and select Copy. The Gentry field. Accept the default name oris Copy of <Data dictionary>. Press ego to the Edit data dictionary form.
Rename change the name of an existing data ddictionary to be renamed. Press mentry field appears. Change the namee to save the new name.
NOTE The Rename and Delete optis highlighted in the list. Yougeneric data dictionary.
352
ab
g message appears. You.
data dictionary to be deleted.are prompted to confirm
tionary that is in use, or hasrrently stored on the
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
NOTE If the dictionary name that you enter already exists, a warnincannot create multiple data dictionaries with the same name
Delete delete a data dictionary. Highlight thePress m and select Delete. Youdeletion.
NOTE You cannot delete a data dicbeen used by a file that is cuGeoExplorer 3.
Use this option … to …
353
ab
name>
the GeoExplorer 3. The Editand values contained in the
tion about adding or editing thes in the selected data dictionary.
it data dictionary form and saveto close the Edit data
any changes.
it data dictionary option list.
ect it. A Text entry field appears.ment field is for reference only
propriate attribute entry form or
d dictionary, but not delete ortion, see Dictionary.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Edit data dictionarys / Setup / Data dictionaries / <Data dictionary
Select a data dictionary from the list of available dictionaries ondata dictionary form displays the comment, features, attributes,selected data dictionary.
Use this form to view informafeatures, attributes, and value
Press e to close the Edany changes. Press fedictionary form and abandon
Press m to view the Ed
To edit the Comment field, selEnter your comment. The Comand it is optional.
To edit a feature, attribute, or value select it from the list. The apPop-up list appears. Enter the changes.
NOTE If a data file is open, you can add to the end of its associatechange any features, attributes, or values. For more informa
354
ab
name> / mailable options. The options that
ictionary form.
• Show values
• Add value
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Edit data dictionary option lists / Setup / Data dictionaries / <Data dictionary
From the Edit data dictionary form, press m to view the avappear depend on what is currently displayed in the Edit data d
The options are:
• Show features • Show attributes
• Add feature • Add attribute
• Copy • Delete
355
ab
ccur in the selected dataributes or values are currentlys and values, and display only
ary, Show features is the
and theirding type
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Use thisoption …
to …
Showfeatures
display the features and feature types that odictionary. This option is only available if attdisplayed. Select this option to hide attributefeatures and feature types.
NOTE When you first open a data dictiondefault option.
Featurescorrespon
356
ab
s, and attribute typesindented to show which
orresponding type
corresponding typefeature
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Showattributes
display the features, feature types, attributeassociated with each feature. Attributes arefeature they belong to.
Use thisoption …
to …
Feature and c
Attributes andfor the above
357
ab
ibute. Values are indented to
When you select this option aWhen a new feature is
the suffix is a digit numberample, New1, then New2, andry field appears. By default,e type, select it. A Pop-up list
orresponding typecorresponding type
menu attribute
minimumumeric attribute
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Show values display the values associated with each attrshow which attribute they belong to.
Add feature add a feature to the current data dictionary.feature is added below the selected feature.created, the prefix for the name is New and(starting at 1 for the first one created), for exso on. To edit the name, select it. A Text entthe new feature is a point. To edit the featurappears.
Use thisoption …
to …
Feature and cAttribute and
Values for the
Maximum andrange for the n
358
ab
y. This option is only availablelect this option, an attribute isnew attribute is created, thedigit number (starting at 1 for
en New2, and so on. To edits. By default, the new attributetype, select it. A Pop-up list
a list of values. To set a menuE . Only one value can be
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Add attribute add an attribute to the current data dictionarwhen attributes are displayed. When you seadded below the selected attribute. When aprefix for the name is New and the suffix is athe first one created), for example, New1, ththe name, select it. A Text entry field appearis a text entry attribute. To edit the attributeappears. The attribute types are:
• Menu – use the Add value option to createvalue as the default, highlight it and pressset as the default.
Use thisoption …
to …
359
ab
e the numeric attribute. Selecthow values from the option list
on form appears:
form to specify the type of fieldcreation and on update, the
m and minimum default values,number of decimal places foreric attribute.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Add attribute(continued)
• Numeric – use the Definition form to definthe value field and pressm. Select Sand then select the value field.The Definiti
Use thisoption …
to …
Use thisentry onmaximuand thethe num
360
ab
text attribute. Select the <-no.->y the type of field entry and the
Date attribute. Select theion form appears. Specify thes, and the format.
e Time attribute. Select theappears. Specify the type of
generate options.
tate or create a break in the list, and you cannot enter a value
is only available when valuesa value is added below the, the prefix for the name isat 1 for the first one created),
e value, select it. The
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Add attribute(continued)
• Text – use the Definition form to define thevalue. The Definition form appears. Specifmaximum number of characters allowed.
• Date – use the Definition form to define theDD/MM/YYYY (Manual) value. The Definittype of field entry, the auto generate option
• Time – use the Definition form to define th12 hour (Manual) value. The Definition formfield entry, the 24 hour option, and the auto
• Separator – use this attribute type to annoof attributes. A separator is not an attributefor it.
Add value add a value to a menu attribute. This optionare displayed. When you select this option,selected value. When a new value is createdNew and the suffix is a digit number (startinge.g. New1, then New2, and so on. To edit thappropriate field appears.
Use thisoption …
to …
361
ab
the feature, attribute, or valuelect Copy. The new feature,he appropriate list. The default.the feature, attribute, or valueou are prompted to confirm
ionary any features, attributes,s on the GeoExplorer 3.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Copy copy a feature, attribute, or value. Highlightthat you want to copy. Press m and seattribute, or value appears at the bottom of tname is Copy of <feature / attribute / value>
Delete delete a feature, attribute, or value. Highlightto delete. Press m and select Delete. Ythe deletion.
NOTE You cannot delete from a data dictor values that are used by data file
Use thisoption …
to …
362
ab
tting or to create a new one. Useical parameters, so configuree settings list to configure carrier
ettings list appears:
ionaries currently stored in theature settings for a dataist. The Edit feature settings
elect feature settings list.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Feature settingss / Setup / Feature settings
Use the Select feature settings list to edit an existing feature seit to set logging intervals and minimum positions. These are critthem to suit your application. You can also use the Select featurphase data collection and offsets.
Select Feature settings from the Setup tab. The Select feature s
This list reflects the data dictGeoExplorer 3. To edit the fedictionary, select it from the lform appears.
Press e to close the S
363
ab
ettings
logging interval for every feature
he form that appears depends on
on about the settings for theictionary.
it feature settings list.
it feature settings option list.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Edit feature settingss / Setup / Feature settings / <Feature name> s
The Edit feature settings list displays the feature name and thein the current data dictionary.
To edit the setting for a feature, select the feature from the list. Twhat type of feature you select—point, line, or area.
• Editing point features
• Editing line and area features
Use this list to view informatifeatures in the current data d
Press e to close the Ed
Press m to view the Ed
364
ab
st, the <Feature name> settingsop of the screen.
t. This list contains one option,nt settings form.
• Accuracy
e the parameters for thearameters affect the GPSature, and the informationn when the feature is selected.
feature name> settings form.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Editing point featuresWhen you select a point feature from the Edit feature settings liform appears. The name of the selected point feature is at the t
These fields are available in the <feature name> settings form:
Press m to display the <feature name> settings option lisAuto-increment. Select this option to display the Auto-increme
• Interval • Minimum positions
• Label 1 • Label 2
Use this form to set or changselected point feature. The ppositions collected for that fedisplayed in the DATA sectio
Press e to close the <
365
ab
Default value
sitions
ds, thery fivetil youan
5 s
t mustefore
er 3yn stayed.
1
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Use thisfield …
to …
Interval specify the interval between feature GPS powhen you are collecting a point feature. Forexample, if you set the interval to five seconGeoExplorer 3 logs GPS positions once eveseconds, from when you start the feature unend it. This is a Numeric entry field or you cselect Off.
Minimumpositions
specify the minimum number of positions thabe logged. If you try to save a point feature benough positions are logged, the GeoExplorwarns you. You can store the feature anywadespite a possible loss of precision, or you caat the feature until enough positions are loggThis is a numeric entry field.
366
ab
carrierop-up
a
Code
eeaturest areas thebel.
The first attribute ofthe feature, or theattribute selected inthe Data DictionaryEditor utility.
Itemslectedan
The second attributeof the feature, or theattribute selected inthe Data DictionaryEditor utility.
Default value
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Accuracy specify whether you want to collect code orphase data for point features. Items in the Plist are:
• Code
• CarrierFor more information, see Carrier phase datcollection.
Label 1 specify the first feature information label to bdisplayed in The Map tab and in the Update flist in The Update tab. Items in the Pop-up lithe attributes of the selected feature, as wellvalue Off which you can select to hide this la
Label 2 specify the second feature information label.in the Pop-up list are the attributes of the sefeature, as well as the value Off which you cselect to hide this label.
Use thisfield …
to …
367
ab
tings list, the <Feature name>e top of the screen.
• Label 1
• Vert. distance
area feature parameters forrameters affect the GPS
ture. You can also use thisto specify the informationselected in the DATA section.
ature name> settings form.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Editing line and area featuresWhen you select a line or area feature from the Edit feature setsettings form appears. The name of the selected feature is at th
These fields are available in the <feature name> settings form:
• Interval • Accuracy
• Label 2
Offset:
• Direction • Horz. distance
Use this form to set the line orthe selected feature. These papositions collected for that feaform to configure Offsets anddisplayed when the feature is
Presse to close the <fe
368
ab
list. This list contains one-increment settings form.
Default value
ng a
theogs
whena
5 s
carrierin the
a
Code
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Press m to display the <feature name> settings optionoption, Auto-increment. Select this option to display the Auto
Use thisfield …
to …
Interval specify the interval (time or distance) betweefeature GPS positions when you are collectinline or area feature. For example, if you setinterval to five seconds, the GeoExplorer 3 lGPS positions once every five seconds, fromyou start the feature until you end it. This isNumeric entry field or you can select Off.
Accuracy specify whether you want to collect code orphase data for line and area features. ItemsPop-up list are:
• Code
• CarrierFor more information, see Carrier phase datcollection.
369
ab
e. Theat thep-up
Right
area 0.00 m
a 0.00 m
eeaturest areas thebel.
The first attribute ofthe feature, or theattribute selected inthe Data DictionaryEditor utility.
Default value
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
OffsetDirection specify the direction to the line or area featur
direction is relative to the direction of traveltime the feature is recorded. Items in the Polist are:
• Right
• LeftHorz.distance
specify the horizontal distance to the line orfeature.
Vert.distance
specify the vertical distance to the line or arefeature.
Label 1 specify the first feature information label to bdisplayed in The Map tab and in the Update flist in The Update tab. Items in the Pop-up lithe attributes of the selected feature, as wellvalue Off which you can select to hide this la
Use thisfield …
to …
370
ab
Itemslectedan
The second attributeof the feature, or theattribute selected inthe Data DictionaryEditor utility.
Default value
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Label 2 specify the second feature information label.in the Pop-up list are the attributes of the sefeature, as well as the value Off which you cselect to hide this label.
Use thisfield …
to …
371
ab
gs / <Feature> settings /
ng. When you create a newin with the next value in the
pecify in the Auto-incremente can increase or decrease, and
is within the acceptable range foran increment value of 5, the next
-incrementing attributes.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Auto-increment settings forms / Setup / Feature settings / Edit feature settinm / Auto-increment
Any numeric or text attribute can be defined as auto-incrementifeature, any auto-incrementing attributes are automatically filledsequence. The new value is based on the step value that you ssettings form and the last value entered in the field. The sequencmay advance in any increment (step) value, provided this valuethe attribute. For example, if an attribute has a value of 10 andvalue automatically generated is 15.
For more information on how values are incremented, see Auto
372
ab
ressm in the <feature>
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
To set auto-incrementing options for the selected feature type, psettings form and select Auto-increment:
373
ab
corresponding field in the formuto-incrementing, select No
crement value, select Stepeld.
GeoExplorer 3 handheld, or inftware. For more information,
form contains a field for each textmeric attribute in the feature. Ais set to No increment if it doesave automatic incrementingled, or to a positive or negativethat indicates the step by which
alues in this field increment.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
The Auto-increment settings form appears
To change an attribute’s auto-increment setting, highlight theand press E. The Increment form appears. To turn off aincrement. To turn auto-incrementing on, or to change the invalue and enter a value in the Numeric entry or Text entry fi
You can set auto-incrementing values for attributes either on thethe Data Dictionary Editor utility in the GPS Pathfinder Office sorefer to the GPS Pathfinder Office Help.
Step valueText or
Thisor nufieldnot henabvaluethe v
numericattribute
374
ab
g attribute, only numeric valuesf the last value you entered waseoExplorer 3 is 48A. However, ifomponent to increment.
ith alphabetic characters, onlyA100-K9 with a step value of 1 is
ed value if it is not acceptable.in the sequence is calculateded by the system.
next value in the sequence, theccurs when:
no default value is specified
equence is incrementing
quence is decrementing
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Auto-incrementing attributes
Although you can define a text attribute as an auto-incrementinwithin the text are incremented or decremented. For example, i47A, and the step value is 1, the next value generated by the Gthe last value was A, the next is still A, as there is no numeric c
When the text consists of more than one number interspersed wthe last numeric part of the string is incremented. For example,incremented to A100-K10.
As with any other default value, you can edit an auto-incrementHowever, if you edit an auto-incremented value, the next valueusing the new value you entered, not the original value generat
If any condition prevents the GeoExplorer 3 from generating theattribute is created with a null value represented by a “?”. This o
• the feature is the first of its type to be created in this file, and
• the last value for the attribute was blank
• the last value was the maximum value in the range and the s
• the last value was the minimum value in the range and the se
375
ab
gs / milable options. Use these options
et all areas
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Edit feature settings option lists / Setup / Feature settings / Edit feature settin
Press m from the Edit feature settings list to view the avato make the same change to all features of a particular type.
The options are:
• Set all points • Set all lines • S
376
ab
en you select this option, thechange the settings for allt any changes and close the
and abandon any changes.n you select this option, the
hange the settings for all linechanges and close the form.
and abandon any changes.en you select this option, thehange the settings for all areachanges and close the form.
and abandon any changes.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Use this option … to set the parameters for all …Set all points point features in a data dictionary. Wh
Set all points form appears. Use it topoint features. Press e to accepform.Press fe to close the form
Set all lines line features in a data dictionary. WheSet all lines form appears. Use it to cfeatures. Press e to accept anyPress fe to close the form
Set all areas area features in a data dictionary. WhSet all areas form appears. Use it to cfeatures. Press e to accept anyPress fe to close the form
377
b
ppears:
ation about the firmware. Ittion:
• Trimble logo andcompany name
• Serial number
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup ta
Abouts / Setup / About
Select the About button from the Setup tab. The About screen a
Use this screen to view informdisplays the following informa
• Product name
• Version number andrelease date
378
ab
ts, reset the internal GPSrade. Select Reset from the
Reset receiver
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Resets / Setup / Reset
Use the Reset list to reset the GeoExplorer 3 to factory defaulreceiver, or to prepare the GeoExplorer 3 for a firmware upgSetup tab. The reset list appears:
The options are:
• Factory defaults • Reset text list •
• Upgrade firmware
379
ab
appears:
s, data files, languages,GeoExplorer 3 to the default
ngitude on the WGS-84data files will be closed.
rmware to Trimble factory
the reset. If you select:
firmware resets to the factory
is cancelled.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Factory defaultss / Setup / Reset / Factory defaults
Select Factory defaults from the Reset list. The following screen
NOTE Resetting to factory defaults does not delete data dictionariecoordinate systems, or waypoints. However, it does reset thelanguage (English), the default coordinate system (latitude/lodatum), and the default data dictionary (Generic). Any open
Use this screen to reset the fidefaults.
You are prompted to confirm
• Yes – the GeoExplorer 3defaults.
• No – the reset operation
380
ab
ed for Text completion. Select
try. For more information, see
firm the reset. If you select:
completion strings is cleared.
ation is cancelled.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Reset text lists / Setup / Reset / Reset text list
Use the Reset text list option to clear the list of strings that is usReset text list from the Reset list.
NOTE You can remove individual strings from the list during text enText completion.
You are prompted to con
• Yes – the list of text
• No – the reset oper
381
ab
et receiver from the Reset list.
l GPS receiver, but, if for someroblem.
the receiver.
firm the reset. If you select:
rer 3 receiver is reset.
ation is cancelled.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Reset receivers / Setup / Reset / Reset receiver
Use the Reset receiver option to reset the receiver. Select ResThe reset receiver screen appears:
NOTE Normally it is unnecessary to reset the GeoExplorer 3 internareason the receiver malfunctions, resetting it can often fix the p
Use this screen to reset
You are prompted to con
• Yes – the GeoExplo
• No – the reset oper
382
ab
manac and perform a warm boot.als from the GPS satellites. If theree minutes, you should contact
es not affect any other files or
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
CAUTION Resetting the internal GPS receiver will delete the current alThe receiver may take up to three minutes to reacquire signGeoExplorer 3 fails to acquire GPS satellite signals within thyour Trimble Dealer for advice.
NOTE Although resetting the receiver deletes the almanac file, it dosettings on the GeoExplorer 3.
383
ab
e upgrade. Select Upgradeears:
figuration settings, datas.
the firmware installation
firm the reset. If you select:
rer 3 is placed in Upgrade
e Installing the firmware.
peration is cancelled.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t
Upgrade firmwares / Setup / Reset / Upgrade firmware
Use the Reset list to prepare the GeoExplorer 3 for a firmwarfirmware from the Reset list. The Upgrade firmware screen app
WARNING Upgrading the firmware deletes all data files, waypoints, condictionaries, user-loaded languages, and coordinate system
Use this screen to beginprocess.
You are prompted to con
• Yes – the GeoExplomode.
For more details, se
• No – the upgrade o
DATA section – IntroductionGeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference 384
THE DATA SECTIONTHE DATA SECTIONTHE DATA SECTIONTHE DATA SECTIONUse the DATA section to open data files, collect new data, update existing data, and view GPSdata graphically.
Press d to move between the tabs in the DATA section.
The DATA section has four tabs:
NOTE The New, Update, and Map tabs are visible only when a data file is open.
NOTE The Map tab is not available with the GeoExplorer 3c edition.
• The File tab • The New tab • The Update tab
• The Map tab
385
b
data file is open. (When a datarm appears:
current form changes to Collect
ata file or open an existing one.nd select the data dictionary that
e option list.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 15: The File ta
15151515 The File tab The File tab The File tab The File tab d / File
To display the File tab, press d .The File tab appears if nofile is open the File tab is not available.) The Collect new data fo
When the Create new file button is highlighted, the name of thenew data. Use this form to create a new data file.
Use this tab to create a new dUse it to change a filename ayou want to use.
Pressm to view the Fil
386
b
the current form changes to.
form, the Update existing data
• File
• Date
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 15: The File ta
The Collect new data form contains:
When the Open selected file button is highlighted, the name ofUpdate existing data. Use this form to open an existing data file
In addition to the fields that are available in the Collect new dataform contains:
• Create new file • Open selected file
• Dictionary
• File size • Time
387
b
e Create new file button isappears. When all fields in
his accepts the new File nameis created and The New tab
the Open selected file buttonta form appears. Use the Fileress E . The Update tab
he file is the data dictionarycreated.
re than seven days ago, then system will not let youof data (although you cannical limitation relates to thestored. To maintain accurateit the time-span of a data file
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 15: The File ta
Use this button … to …Create new file create a new rover data file. When th
highlighted, the Collect new data formthe form are correct, press E. Tand Dictionary. A new rover data fileappears.
Open selected file open a selected rover data file. Whenis highlighted, the Update existing dafield to select the file to be opened. Pappears.The data dictionary associated with tthat was selected when that file was
NOTE If a data file was created moGeoExplorer 3 data collectioreopen it for further loggingreview and edit it). This techway in which GPS times arestorage, it is necessary to limto seven days.
388
b
ile to open. When Create newhe filename.ld are highlighted, pressthe GeoExplorer 3 handheld.the list, including the number
file’s transfer status, appears
tes a filename for new files. ItH X where:
,ay.
t “A” for the first file in thaton.
only a suggestion. You caner a new name. Filenamescters long.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 15: The File ta
Use this field … to …File edit the filename, or select an existing f
file is highlighted, press E to edit tWhen Open selected file and the File fieE to see a list of the files stored inStatus information for the selected file inof point, line, and area features and thebelow the list.The GeoExplorer 3 automatically generauses the following formula: R MM DD H• R is the Filename prefix,• MM is the current UTC month,• DD is the current UTC day of the month• and HH is the current UTC hour of the dX increments within this hour, starting ahour, then “B” for the second file, and so
NOTE The auto-generated filename isalter the suggested name or entmust be not more than 20 chara
389
b
ata dictionaries currentlytion system. When Createictionary is the one most
ing the GPS Pathfinder Officet the Dictionary field and press
appears.available. It lets you recorda simple descriptive attribute.nd create Data dictionaries.this field is read-only andssociated with the selected
en creating a data file ist file. It determines whichd to the file, and what
er 3, you can only add to thecannot make changes toom it.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 15: The File ta
Dictionary select a data dictionary from the list of dloaded on the GeoExplorer 3 data collecnew file is highlighted, the default data drecently loaded to the GeoExplorer 3 ussoftware. To select a dictionary, highlighE. The list of available dictionariesThe “Generic” data dictionary is alwayspoint, line, and area features, each withYou can use the GeoExplorer 3 to edit aWhen Open selected file is highlighted,shows the name of the data dictionary afile.
NOTE The data dictionary selected whpermanently associated with thatypes of features can be recordeattributes the features have.
NOTE When a file is on the GeoExplorassociated data dictionary. Youexisting items, or delete items fr
Use this field … to …
390
b
d data file.ated.ated.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 15: The File ta
File size view the size, in kilobytes, of the selecteTime view the time when the file was last updDate view the date when the file was last upd
Use this field … to …
391
b
le options.
• Base station
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 15: The File ta
File option listd / File / mWhen the File tab is active, press m to display the availab
The options are:
• Delete file(s) • Rename file(s)
392
b
st appears:
• Lines
• Free space
• Data dictionary
delete rover and base data files., highlight it and press E .ted to confirm the deletion.
to display the Delete all file(s)
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 15: The File ta
Delete file(s)d / File / m / Delete file(s)
Select Delete file(s) from the File option list. The Delete file(s) li
The Delete file(s) screen displays the following:
• List of files • Points
• Areas • Between feature GPS
• Status • File size
• Time • Date
Use this list toTo delete a fileYou are promp
Press moption.
Message box
List of roverand base files
393
b
leted or renamed. Informationthe message box. As you
yed information changes
r of point features in the
of line features in the
r of area features in the
), with the number of GPSthe selected file.KB) remaining in the
s been transferred from theo an office computer.tes (KB).ected file is associated with.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 15: The File ta
Information DescriptionList of files Use this list to select the file(s) to be de
about the highlighted file is displayed inscroll through the list of files, the displaaccordingly.
Points The point symbol ( ), with the numbeselected file.
Lines The line symbol ( ), with the numberselected file.
Areas The area symbol ( ), with the numbeselected file.
Between featureGPS
The Between feature GPS symbol (positions recorded between features in
Free space The amount of free space in kilobytes (GeoExplorer 3 data collection system.
Status Indicates whether the highlighted file haGeoExplorer 3 data collection system t
File size The size of the highlighted file in kilobyData dictionary The name of the data dictionary the sel
394
b
.
.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 15: The File ta
Time The time when the file was last updatedDate The date when the file was last updated
Information Description
395
b
ll files option.
om the GeoExplorer 3 handheld.isplays a warning when your.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 15: The File ta
Delete file(s) option listd / File / m / Delete file(s) / mPress m from the Delete file(s) list to display the Delete a
Use the Delete all files option to delete all rover and base files frYou are prompted to confirm the deletion. The GeoExplorer 3 ddelete files that have not been transferred to the office compute
396
b
s) list appears:
• Lines
• Free space
• Data dictionary
rename rover and base datae a file, highlight it and pressext entry field appears,current filename.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 15: The File ta
Rename file(s)d / File / m / Rename file(s)
Select Rename file(s) from the File option list. The Rename file(
The Rename file(s) screen displays the following:
• List of files • Points
• Areas • Between feature GPS
• Status • File size
• Time • Date
Use this list tofiles. To renamE . The Tdisplaying the
Message box
397
b
orm appears:
n field appears.
• File
base file or open an existingo collect base data. Base data isOffice software to differentiallyt-processing.
the GPS Pathfinder Office Help.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 15: The File ta
Base stationd / File / m / Base station
Select Base station from the option list. The Collect base data f
The Collect base data form displays the following:
When the Create new file button is highlighted, the Configuratio
• Create new file • Open selected file
Use this form to create a newone. A base station is used tused by the GPS Pathfindercorrect rover files during pos
For more information, refer to
398
b
ured as follows:
ffect on the base station GPS
fields appear:
files in the GeoExplorer 3 data
ure the base station is recordingThe satellites tracked by thestation.
• Time
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 15: The File ta
The GPS configuration settings for base stations are pre-config
• PDOP Mask = 10
• SNR Mask = 2
• Elevation Mask = 0
NOTE These cannot be altered. The GPS slider settings have no esettings.
When the Open selected file button is highlighted, the following
NOTE The Open selected file button only appears if there are basecollection system.
Plan carefully for the roving unit(s) and the base station. Make sdata at the same time that the roving unit is recording positions.rover must be included among the satellites tracked by the base
• File size • Free space
• Date
399
b
that it will track a satellite that theh as hills or buildings that can
tion file, you cannot create a new
s 12 channels to receive GPS
ta file.on the GeoExplorer 3
.
.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 15: The File ta
The further a rover is from the base station, the greater the riskbase station cannot see. Think about potential obstructions sucblock a satellite signal to the base station.
While the GeoExplorer 3 handheld is logging data to a base starover data file or open an existing one.
NOTE The GeoExplorer 3 data collection system automatically usesignals when you use it as a base station.
Field DescriptionFile size The size, in kilobytes, of the selected daFree space The amount of free space, in kilobytes,
handheld.Time The time when the file was last updatedDate The date when the file was last updated
400
b
e field, select the Create new file
ase station reference positionthat controls how the
tation data.
ging base file data.
Base station option list.
• Altitude
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 15: The File ta
Create new filed / File / m / Base station
To create a new base data file with the name indicated in the Filbutton. The Base station form appears:
Use this form to enter the band the logging informationGeoExplorer 3 logs base s
Press l to start Log
Press m to view the
The following fields are available in the Base station form:
• Lat • Lon
• Antenna height • Measurements
401
b
, automatically uses the lastLon, and Altitude values appear
t enter values for all position
sults of a previously conducted
al for each GPS rover is an exact. If you set the position logging’s measurement logging interval,ifferential corrections. These aref the base station and rover(s)
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 15: The File ta
When you create a new base file the GeoExplorer 3, by defaultreference position entered. If no position has been entered, Lat,as “?”.
If you provide a reference position for the base station, you musfields (Lat, Lon, and Altitude).
You can enter the reference position from a map, or from the recontrol survey.
TIP For greatest accuracy, make sure that the position logging intervmultiple of the measurement logging interval at the base stationinterval to a value that is not an exact multiple of the base stationthe differential correction program has to compute interpolated dless accurate than those computed when the logging intervals oare synchronized.
402
b
Default values is a Last value entered
his is a Last value entered
s is ar HAE,rence.
Last value entered
ric entry
antennathfindert ton (on theGPSr (APC).ntialthfinder
Last value entered
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 15: The File ta
Use this field... to …Lat enter the latitude of the base station. Thi
Numeric entry field.Lon enter the longitude of the base station. T
numeric entry field.Altitude enter the altitude of the base station. Thi
numeric entry field and displays in MSL odepending on the configured altitude refe
Antenna height enter the antenna height. This is a Numefield.
NOTE It is important that you enter theheight correctly, as the GPS PaOffice software uses this heightransform the reference positioground) into the position of thereceiver’s antenna phase centeThis APC is used by the DiffereCorrection utility in the GPS PaOffice software.
403
b
f the
s to logor useTorawbly often.gginge intervalresult in
d by these qualityge space
15 sDefault value
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 15: The File ta
Measurements enter the measurement logging interval obase station.The primary task of a GPS base station iraw GPS measurements from satellites fwhen differentially correcting rover files.provide accurate differential corrections,measurements should be logged reasonaThe maximum permitted measurement lointerval is 30 seconds. You can reduce thto a minimum of one second, but this willup to 30 times as much data being loggeGeoExplorer 3. The default setting of 15provides a good compromise between thof postprocessed positions and the storaand processing time required.
Use this field... to …
404
b
on is displayed in the message
Memory full in
ssage box at the bottom of thedisplays information about thee. The logging icon appears intus bar. It indicates how manysitions have successfully beento the file.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 15: The File ta
Logging base file dataTo start logging base file data, press l. Logging informatibox.
The message box displays the following:
• Started at • Last •
The mescreenbase filthe StaGPS pologged
Messagebox Logging
icon
405
b
. You are prompted to confirm
rted logging to the data file.opped logging to the data file.ta storage space is full. Thismeasurements logged.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 15: The File ta
To stop using the GeoExplorer 3 as a base station, press ethat you want to stop logging base station data.
Information DescriptionStarted at The time that the base station staLast The time that the base station stMemory full in The time remaining before the da
value is computed after every 10
406
b
tton in the Collect base dataappears. Select the file to beon and pressE . The Baseerence position, antenna height,
ew file.
omatically uses the reference
erwrites the previously entered
ata file is shown in thenfiguration cannot be edited.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 15: The File ta
Open selected filed / File / m / Base station
To open an existing base file, highlight the Open selected file buform. Select the File field and press E. A list of base filesopened and presse. Highlight the Open selected file buttstation form appears. Use this form to enter the base station refand measurement logging interval.
For more information about the Base station form, see Create n
NOTE When you open an existing base file, the GeoExplorer 3 autposition that was entered when the file was created.
NOTE Changing the reference position while logging a base file ovreference position.
NOTE The name of a configuration file that is used with the base dConfiguration field. This field cannot be changed and the co
407
b
iew the list of base data files
r 3 automatically generates a fileH X, where:
in that hour, then “B” for thesigned to the third file (“C”)
nge it or enter an entirelypress E . Use the
list of base files appears. Use
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 15: The File ta
Filed / File / m / Base station
Use the File field to change the name of a base data file, or to vcurrently loaded on the GeoExplorer 3 data collection system.
When the Create new file button is highlighted, the GeoExplorename for a new base data file. It is uses the formula B MM DD H
• B is the Filename prefix
• MM is the current UTC month
• DD is the current UTC day of the month
• HH is the current UTC hour of the day
The X increments within this hour, starting at “A” for the first filesecond file, and so on. For example, B052523C is the name ascreated on May 25th, between 2300 and 2400 hours.
The auto-generated file name is only a suggestion. You can chadifferent name. To edit the file name, highlight the File field andText entry field that appears to change the filename.
When the Open selected file button is highlighted, select File. Athis list to select the file to be opened.
408
b
le options.
• Here
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 15: The File ta
Base station option list
d / File / m / Base station / mPress m from the Base station form to display the availab
The options are:
• Waypoint • Unknown
409
b
ion fields with the location of athis option to display a list ofypoint that you want to assign.reference position fields.
eference position in the field,tered in the DifferentialPathfinder Office software.
ion fields with the current GPS
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 15: The File ta
Use this option … to …Waypoint automatically fill in the reference posit
previously recorded waypoint. Selectwaypoints. Use the list to select the waas the base station reference position
Unknown assign null values to the base station
NOTE You do not have to enter a rbut a reference has to be enCorrection utility in the GPS
Here automatically fill in the reference positposition (if any).
410
b
e. If no data file is open,appears:
1 or 5 to highlight it in theighlight the Now or Later button,t the GeoExplorer 3 to start
at feature. Press E . AnUse this form for Entering
new feature open, you cante tab, open an existing
te its attribute data. For morehe Update tab.
g GPS positions before selecting
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 16: The New ta
16161616 The New tabThe New tabThe New tabThe New tabd / New
To display the New tab, press d until the New tab is activThe File tab appears. If a data file is open, the New feature list
To start a new feature, presslist. Then press2 or4 to hdepending on when you wanlogging GPS positions for thattribute entry form appears.attribute values.
NOTE While you have aswitch to the Updafeature, and updainformation, see T
Press m to view the New feature option list.
TIP Use the Advanced datalogging options function to start loggina feature.
411
b
lected feature. The selectedtarted simultaneously. Ther when the GeoExplorer 3 isr logging GPS positions is
used. This lets you modifyto the feature. You can also
begin a feature with an, see Averaged vertices).ar flashes to indicate that the
GPS positions for the selected. For more information, see
to enter the attributes for aure. For example, if you see aLater option and enter the
ards it. When you reach theitions. When you are finished,
nd positions.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 16: The New ta
Use this option … to …Now start logging GPS positions for the se
feature and GPS data collection are slogging icon appears in the Status balogging GPS positions. The default foNow.
Later open the feature with GPS logging paattribute values before GPS is addeduse the Later option when you want toaveraged vertex (for more informationThe pause logging icon in the status bGeoExplorer 3 is not currently storingfeature. To start logging, press lPause and resume logging.The Later option is useful if you wantfeature, but you are not yet at the feattree feature in the distance, select theattributes for the tree as you walk towtree, press l to start logging pospress e to store the attributes a
412
b
riate attribute entry form appears:
riate data entry field appears—try. Use this field to enter thetions for the feature, pressrs. (See Storing features.)
o confirm that you want tositions.
to enter attribute values for the
ribute entry form option list.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 16: The New ta
Entering attribute valuesd / New / <Feature>
When you select a feature from the New feature list, an approp
To enter a value for an attribute, select the attribute. The appropMenu entry, Numeric entry, Text entry, Date entry, or Time envalue. When you have entered attribute data and collected posie . The feature is stored and the New feature list reappea
To discard a feature, press f+ e . You are prompted tabandon changes. This will discard the feature attributes and po
Use the <feature name> formfeature.
Pressm to view the Att
413
b
try form.
• New vertex
end on the type of feature
cted, the only option is Offset.
ected, the available options are
ted, Offset, Segment, and.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 16: The New ta
Attribute entry form option listd / New / <Feature> / mPress m to display the options available in the attribute en
The options are:
• Offset • Segment
The options that appear depselected.
When a point feature is sele
When an area feature is selOffset and New vertex.
When a line feature is selecNew vertex are all available
414
b
m and select Offset. Thethe offset information. For
select Segment. For more.e vertex is open, all positions
e position on a line. For more
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 16: The New ta
Use thisoption …
to …
Offset create an offset for this feature only. PressOffset form appears. Use this form to entermore information, see Offsets.
Segment segment a line feature. Press m andinformation, see Segmenting line features
New vertex open a vertex within a line or area. While threcorded will be averaged to create a singlinformation, see Averaged vertices.
415
b
sitions for the feature, pressthe bottom of the New featurefully.
+ e .
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 16: The New ta
Storing featuresTo save the contents of an attribute entry form and store the poe . A message is displayed briefly in the message box, atlist. The message indicates that the feature was stored success
To abandon a feature and return to the New feature list, pressf
Message box
416
b
d attributes for a feature. Whileany GPS positions that areure, remain stationary at thebefore pressinge . Ifthe feature or around the
pressing e .
minimum number of positionsether you want to store the
lorer 3 stores the currentou select No, the attribute formrer 3 continues to record GPSure.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 16: The New ta
You may not want to presse as soon as you have enterethe feature is “active” (while you are in the attribute entry form),logged are associated with that feature. If recording a point featfeature until the minimum number of positions has been loggedrecording a line or area feature, continue to walk or drive alongperimeter until you have traversed the feature completely before
If you are collecting a feature and you press e before thehas been logged, the GeoExplorer 3 prompts you to confirm whfeature.
If you select Yes, the GeoExpnumber of GPS positions. If yreappears, and the GeoExplopositions for the selected feat
417
b
e logging icon appears in theGeoExplorer 3 stops loggingin the status bar.
rd GPS positions, or velocities. Itonfigured for Carrier Phase Datatprocessing.
nction to stop briefly, or if youine or area feature and have tome obstacle before picking uperimeter again.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 16: The New ta
Pause and resume loggingWhen the GeoExplorer 3 handheld is logging GPS positions, thStatus bar. Pressl to pause logging. While paused, theGPS positions and the pause icon flashes over the logging icon
When GPS logging is paused, the GeoExplorer 3 does not recodoes continue to record carrier measurements (if the feature is cCollection) and certain critical GPS information required for pos
Pause icon
Use the pause fuare collecting a ltravel around sothe line or area p
418
b
ops flashing and the logging iconline or area feature, the
rdless of the logging interval that
gging to a rover data file. You
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 16: The New ta
To resume logging GPS, pressl again. The pause icon stappears again. Each time you resume logging while collecting aGeoExplorer 3 data collection system logs a GPS position (regayou have set for line/area features).
NOTE You can only use pause and resume logging when you are locannot do this when logging GPS data to a base station file.
419
b
ions.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 16: The New ta
New feature option listd / New / mPress m from New feature list to display the available opt
The options are:
• Repeat • Continue <feature>
420
b
select Repeat. A ✓ appearsRepeat option. For mores.sm and select Continuereappears.
area feature, you can closember of point features, andrea using the Continue option.Continuing line and area
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 16: The New ta
Use this option … to …Repeat repeat a feature. Press m and
in the check box to the right of theinformation, see Repeating feature
Continue <feature> continue a line or area feature. Pres<feature>. The attribute entry form
NOTE While traversing a line orthe feature, collect any nuthen continue the line or aFor more information, seefeatures.
421
e tab
the GeoExplorer 3c edition.
active.
is not currently open, Theears. When a data file ispdate feature list appears. Toature, select it from the list.entry form appears.ave an existing feature openupdate, you can switch to theen a new feature, and recordd GPS data. For more, see The New tab.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 17: The Updat
17171717 The Update tabThe Update tabThe Update tabThe Update tabNOTE Data update, using transferred .ssf files, is not available with
d / Update
To display the Update tab, press d until the Update tab is
Press m to view the Update feature option list.
Messagebox
If a data fileFile tab appopen, the Uupdate a feAn attributeWhile you hfor attributeNew tab, opattribute aninformation
422
e tab
ea
ibute information for the
hat will be displayed, use thehe Setup tab.ted feature was collected or
ion to the highlighted feature,
he highlighted point feature.ighted line feature.hted area feature.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 17: The Updat
The message box at the bottom of the screen displays:
• Labels • Date and Time
• Distance to point/start • Positions / Length / Ar
Information DescriptionLabels Two configurable labels showing attr
highlighted feature.
TIP To select the two attributes tFeature settings option in t
Date and Time The date and time when the highlighlast updated.
Distance to point/start
The distance from your current positor the start point of a line or area.
Positions / Length /Area
The number of positions logged for tThe computed 2D length of the highlThe computed 2D area of the highlig
423
e tab
re a check box appears to the
st is empty. A message
c edition. The GeoExplorer 3cathfinder Office software.
the feature is not updated.
a ✓ , the feature is updated.
Mark.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 17: The Updat
Updating attribute valuesd / Update / <Feature>
When a file is transferred from the GPS Pathfinder Office softwaright of each feature.
NOTE When no features are stored in the file, the Update feature liindicates that there are no features.
NOTE The ✓ and " symbols do not appear on the GeoExplorer 3edition does not support transferred .ssf files from the GPS P
If a check box is empty,
If the check box contains
For more information see
424
e tab
ibute entry form appears:
entry field appears: Menu entry,
dated information is stored ande has been updated.
o confirm this cancellation.
s to files transferred from theu update features collected
te values for the feature.
pdate attribute option list.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 17: The Updat
To update a feature select it from the Update feature list. An attr
To edit the value for an attribute, select it. The appropriate dataNumeric entry, Text entry, Date entry, or Time entry.
When you have edited the attribute data, press e. The upthe Update feature list reappears. A ✓ indicates that the featur
To abandon a feature, press fe . You are prompted t
NOTE The ✓ (to indicate that a feature has been updated) only applieGPS Pathfinder Office software. A ✓ does not appear when yoduring a current data collection/update session.
Use the form to edit the attribu
Press m to display the U
425
e tab
list.
n transferred from the GPS
• New vertex
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 17: The Updat
Update attribute option listd / Update / <Feature> / mPress m from the attribute entry form to display the option
The options are:
NOTE The Mark option only appears when the updated file has beePathfinder Office software.
• Offset • Mark
426
e tab
ure in the update feature list.
e selected feature. When your a feature, a ✓ automaticallytion to manually insert a ✓ to
his option only appears in thehave chosen to update GPSis open, all positions recordedosition on a line. For more
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 17: The Updat
Use this option … to …Offset create an offset for the selected feat
For more information, see Offsets.Mark place a ✓ in the check box next to th
update the attributes or GPS data foappears in the check box. Use this opmark the feature as updated.
New vertex Open a vertex within a line or area. TUpdate attribute option list once youdata for the feature. While the vertexwill be averaged to create a single pinformation, see Averaged vertices.
427
e tab
attribute entry form appears.logging GPS positions.ce fields are configured, thee Data form in the Setup tab to
ata and starts logging GPS dataf you select No, it does not log
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 17: The Updat
Updating GPS dataTo update the GPS data for a feature, select it from the list. ThePress l . The GeoExplorer 3 data collection system startsDepending on how the Allow GPS update and Warning distanGeoExplorer 3 prompts you to confirm the GPS update. (Use thconfigure these fields.)
If you select Yes, the GeoExplorer 3 replaces the existing GPS dnow or later depending on the option selected on the New tab. Inew GPS data.
428
e tab
if a new feature is open in The. However, you can still update
e . The updatednew GPS positions replace the
to the feature to indicate that it is
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 17: The Updat
NOTE You can only update GPS data for one feature at a time, soNew tab, you cannot update GPS data for an existing featureits attribute information (see Updating attribute values).
When you have finished collecting positions for a feature, pressinformation is stored and the Update feature list reappears. Theexisting position for the selected feature and a ✓ appears nextupdated.
429
e tab
t
list.
• Filter
• Position / Summary
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 17: The Updat
Update feature option lisd / Update / mPress m from the Update feature list to display the option
The options are:
• Delete / Undelete • Sort
• Search • Set target / Clear target
430
e tab
s m and then select
To delete the current target, youclear the target status from theet.
o the office computer where you
d 4 are deleted.
o not appear on the Map or
rom the Update feature list,d select Undelete. The lineame.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 17: The Updat
Delete / Undeleted / Update / m / Delete
To delete a feature from the Update feature list, highlight it. PresDelete. A line appears through the deleted feature.
You cannot delete a feature if it is the current navigation target.must first select a different feature or waypoint as the target, orcurrent target. For more information, see Set target / Clear targ
The GPS Pathfinder Office software transfers deleted features tcan undelete them, but it does not export them to the GIS.
In this example, features 1 an
NOTE Deleted features dthe Chart.
To restore a deleted feature fhighlight it. Press m andisappears from the feature n
431
e tab
he Sort by sublist appears (see
e list is sorted appear at the end
signed when the feature isnumber assigned to a feature.
, sort the Update feature list by
• Distance
o last.om closest to furthest away.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 17: The Updat
Sortd / Update / m / Sort
To sort the Update feature list, press m and select Sort. TSublists). The options are:
A sort is applied at the time you select it. Features added after thof the list regardless of the sorting order.
NOTE Each feature in a file has a unique feature number that is ascreated. Sorting the Update feature list does not change the
TIP To display features so that their feature numbers are sequentialtime.
• Feature • Time
Use this option … to …Feature sort by feature name.Time sort by the time recorded, from first tDistance sort by distance to start of feature, fr
432
e tab
g features based on a set of
he Filter by sublist appears (see
the Update feature list. This iconen.
re retained in the Update featureia are hidden.
not appear in the update featureyed at a time. Each new filter
• Attribute
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 17: The Updat
Filterd / Update / m / Filter
Filtering on the GeoExplorer 3 is a method of selectively viewincriteria set out below.
To filter the Update feature list, pressm and select Filter. TSublists). The options are:
When a filter is applied, the filter icon appears in the title ofalso appears beside the filename at the bottom of the Map scre
Whenever a filter is applied, the features that match the criteria alist and in the Map screen. Features that do not match the criter
A filter remains in effect until a file is closed. New features maylist, depending on how the list is filtered. Only one filter is displareplaces the previous one.
• None • Feature
• Time • Status
433
e tab
signed when the feature isnumber assigned to a feature.
ture list and the Map tab.feature type. Select the
(see Checklists). Select theIf you select the Gate feature,s filtered and only Gate
attribute values. Select thete form appears. You can usen attribute value from a single
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 17: The Updat
NOTE Each feature in a file has a unique feature number that is ascreated. Filtering the Update feature list does not change the
Use this option … to …None remove all filters from the Update feaFeature filter the Update feature list based on
Feature option. A checklist appearsfeature type(s) that you want to filter.for example, the Update feature list ifeatures are displayed.
Attribute filter the Update feature list based onAttribute option. The Filter by attributhis form to set a filter which selects afeature or across all features.
434
e tab
the time or date that a featureisplay only those featuresa.m. and 12:00 p.m.rs with the four fields: Startate. Filter the list using one orelect it and use the
the current status of thethis option to display onlyd during the current session).appears with the options:
er. The Update list is filteredpear.
• Imported
• Updated
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 17: The Updat
Time filter the Update feature list based onwas started. For example, you can dcollected on May 26th, between 9:00Select the Time option. A form appeatime, Start date, End time, and End dmore of these fields. To edit a field, sNumeric entry field to enter a value.
Status filter the Update feature list based onfeatures. For example, you can usethose features that are new (collecteSelect the Status option. A checklist
Select the status that you want to filtand only features with that status ap
Use this option … to …
• Deleted
• Not deleted
• New
435
e tab
e Filter by attribute form:
ute field appears. Select the Anyttribute name to filter only values
Feature type field to set aes in all features to they in the Operator and Attribute
ure type field to set a filter thats in features of that type.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 17: The Updat
Filter by attribute formd / Update / m / Filter / Filter by Attribute
Select the Attribute option from the Filter by sublist to display th
When you select a feature from the Feature type field, the Attriboption to filter all attributes from this feature type, or select an ain that attribute.
Select the Any option from thefilter that compares all attributoperator and value you specifvalue fields.
Select a feature from the Featonly compares attribute value
436
e tab
you have made in the Feature
t are …accepted.
lue must include the value younter “pot”, then the valuesepted, as well as “pot”.
he attribute may include the
ensitive.
value must be greater than thees, “a” is considered the lowestor example, if you specify”, “parrot”, and “tree” ared “cat” are not.
ue must be less than the text
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 17: The Updat
The options in the Operator field depend on the selections thattype and Attribute fields.
If the attribute type is … the options in the Operator lisAny, Text, or File • None — any attribute value is
• Containing — the attribute vaspecify. For example, if you e“potato” and “spot” will be acc
• Not containing — no part of tvalue you specify.
NOTE The text is not case s
• Greater than — the attributetext you specify. For text valuvalue and “z” is the highest. F“park”, then the values “parksaccepted, but “parachute” an
• Less than — the attribute valyou specify.
437
e tab
must match the value you
alue must not match the value
t are …
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 17: The Updat
Numeric, Date, or Time • None
• Equals — the attribute valuespecify exactly.
• Not equal to — the attribute vyou specify.
• Greater than
• Less thanMenu • Equals
• Not equal to
If the attribute type is … the options in the Operator lis
438
e tab
list. You can also search from
rch. The Search form appears.
ria are searched.
s one option, Reset. Select thises.
cting a search direction,rison operator, and a value tolose this form and start theatches the search criteria is
ure list.
rom the currently highlightedrt or end of the list.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 17: The Updat
Searchd / Update / m / Search
Searching is a method of locating features in the Update featureThe Map tab.
To search the Update feature list, press m and select Sea
NOTE If a filter is applied, only the features that meet the filter crite
Press m to display the Search option list. This list containoption to return the fields in the Search form to their default valu
Set the search criteria by selefeature type, attribute, compasearch for. Press e to csearch. The first feature that mhighlighted in the Update feat
NOTE The search starts ffeature, not the sta
439
e tab
• Attribute
lect Forwards to search frompdate feature list or Map tabkwards to search from the
he list.Select Any to search all
feature to search. Select Anyfeature.ield, this field does not appear.he search. The operatorsble for filtering by attribute.
tribute form.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 17: The Updat
The Search form contains:
• Direction • Feature Type
• Operator • Attribute Value
Use this field … to …Direction specify the direction of the search. Se
the currently selected feature in the Utowards the end of the list. Select Bacselected feature towards the start of t
Feature Type select a single feature type to search.features in the Update feature list.
Attribute specify an attribute from the selectedto search all attributes in the selectedIf Any is selected in the Feature type f
Operator specify the comparison operation for tavailable are the same as those availaFor more information, see Filter by at
Attribute Value specify the search value.
440
e tab
the navigation target, pressears beside the selected feature
position information as theis deleted or has no positions.
the Update feature list, it is alsothe NAV section.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 17: The Updat
Set target / Clear targetd / Update / m / Set target
d / Update / m / Clear target
To set the currently selected feature in the Update feature list asm and select Set target. The crossed-flag target icon appin the list, and is cleared from any previously selected target.
NOTE You cannot select a deleted feature or a feature that has notarget. This option is not available when the selected feature
When you set a target inset in the Map tab and in
Currentnavigationtarget
441
e tab
Update feature list that ishe target icon disappears from
and NAV sections.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 17: The Updat
To clear the currently selected target, highlight the feature in theselected as the target, press m, and select Clear target. Tbeside the feature name, and the target is cleared in the DATA
442
e tab
te feature option list, pressfeature appear in the messagedisplayed is the average GPSstart point of the feature.
age box display to showmary.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 17: The Updat
Position / Summaryd / Update / m / Position
d / Update / m / Summary
To view the GPS position of the feature highlighted in the Updam and select Position. The coordinates of the highlightedbox at the bottom of the screen. For point features, the positionposition. For line and area features, the position displayed is the
When the Position option is selected, you can change the messsummary information. To do this, pressm and select Sum
443b
.
. If no data file is open, The File
se this tab to view and selectatures for update. It is aaphical view of the Updateature list that you access frome Update tab.
essm to view theap option list.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 18: The Map ta
18181818 The Map tabThe Map tabThe Map tabThe Map tabNOTE The Map tab is not available with the GeoExplorer 3c edition
d / Map
To display the Map tab, pressd until the Map tab is activetab appears. If a data file is open, the Map tab appears:
UfegrfeTh
PrM
Scale
Current position
North
Updated
Line featureFilename
Area feature
Waypoint
GPS trailpoint feature
Betweenindicator
Filter icon
Last selectedfeature
Targetfeature GPS
444b
Use the Map tab, in the DATAem as targets. Use The Chart
ts.
• Features
• GPS trail
• Scale
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 18: The Map ta
The Map screen displays:
NOTE There are two map screens available on the GeoExplorer 3.section, to view, select, and update features as well as set thtab, in the NAV section, to navigate to features and waypoin
• Between feature GPS • Current position
• Filename • Filter icon
• Last selected feature • North indicator (N)
• Target • Waypoint
445b
ged between features.
ature type appears as aa feature indicates that the
ntly open.been applied to the file. Useto set or clear a filter.
ave taken.ains highlighted.
in/out, the scale changes
the target.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 18: The Map ta
Item DescriptionBetween featureGPS
Small crosses that show all positions log
Current position Your current GPS position.Features Point, line, and area features. Each fe
different symbol on the map. The ✓ onfeature is updated.
Filename The name of the data file that is curreFilter icon An icon that appears when a filter has
the Filter option in the Map option listGPS trail A trail of dots that shows the path you hLast selectedfeature
The last selected feature on the map rem
North indicator (N) North direction.Scale The scale of the screen. As you zoom
accordingly.Target The feature or waypoint currently set asWaypoint A waypoint on the GeoExplorer 3.
446b
the same tasks using it as youure list are related. When youUpdate feature list, and vicefrom the list.
, press two arrow keys at the
is visible, the cursor initiallyselected feature is not visible,the last location on the screenrwise, the cursor appears in the
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 18: The Map ta
Using the Map tabThe Map tab is similar to The Update tab. You can perform allcan using the Update feature list. The Map tab and Update featselect a feature on the map, the same feature is selected in theversa. If you delete a feature on the map, that feature is deleted
TIP To move between these two tabs, press d.
To display the cursor, press an arrow key.
To move the cursor, press the arrow keys. To move it diagonallysame time.
If the selected featureappears over it. If thethe cursor appears at(if that is visible). Othecenter of the screen.
Cursor
447b
is close to a feature, the symbold up to two labels showinglected.
the Feature settings option in
e information disappears.r feature is selected.
tically pans (half a screen width)the same geographic position. Inle.
ple, the Gate feature isected.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 18: The Map ta
Use the cursor to select a feature on the map. When the cursorfor that feature is highlighted, and the feature number, name, anattribute values from the feature are displayed. The feature is se
TIP To configure the two attributes that are displayed as labels, usethe Setup tab.
As the cursor moves away from a highlighted feature, the featurHowever, the feature remains selected (highlighted) until anothe
When the cursor moves to the edge of the map, the map automain the direction of the cursor movement. The cursor remains inthese circumstances, the current GPS position may not be visib
In this examcurrently sel
Selected feature
448b
to pan the screen (half a screenisible.
n is not visible, the screene center of the screen.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 18: The Map ta
Alternatively, press f2, f4, f1, or f5width). You cannot pan across the screen unless the cursor is v
To remove the cursor, press e . If the current GPS positioautomatically pans until the current GPS position symbol is in th
449b
• Zoom extents
• Filter
• Layers
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 18: The Map ta
Map option listd / Map / mPress m to display the available options for the Map.
The options are:
• Zoom in • Zoom out
• Pan/select • Delete
• Set target • Search
450b
is magnifies the display (bye bottom of the screen adjusts, the screen zooms in on thethe screen zooms in on the
his lets you see a greater arean the bottom of the screens active, the screen zooms outr is not active, the screenposition.
ayers are visible on the maps. What it shows depends onthe features are filtered.een, the Zoom extents option
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 18: The Map ta
Use this option … to …Zoom in zoom in to the map screen.
Press m and select Zoom in. Thdecreasing the scale). The scale on thaccordingly. When the cursor is activecursor. When the cursor is not active,current GPS position.
Zoom out zoom out of the map screen.Press m and select Zoom out. T(by increasing the scale). The scale oadjusts accordingly. When the cursor irelative to the cursor. When the cursozooms out relative to the current GPS
Zoom extents change the scale so that all selected lscreen. The Zoom extents option variewhat layers are selected and whetherIf nothing can be displayed on the scrdoes not affect the map scale.
451b
creen in the direction of thee cursor to select features on-
is, highlight it with the cursor,e appears through the deletedthe feature is deleted from the
use the
currently set as the target
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 18: The Map ta
Pan/select activate the on-screen cursor.Use the on-screen cursor to pan the scursor movement. You can also use thscreen.
Delete delete a feature from the map. To do thpress m, and select Delete. A linfeature in the Update feature list andmap.
NOTE To restore deleted featuresUpdate feature option list.
NOTE A feature or waypoint that iscannot be deleted.
Use this option … to …
452b
ap screen. Select the Filterwing options:
on the feature names.
on attribute values.
the time or date a feature wasded.
n the current status of the
urrently selected by the cursorarget. The crossed-flag targetor waypoint.
Clear target.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 18: The Map ta
Filter filter the features that appear on the moption. A sublist appears with the follo
• None – Removes all filters.
• Feature – Filters the features based
• Attribute – Filters the features based
• Time – Filters the features based onstarted, or the time or date it was en
• Status – Filters the features based ofeatures.
For more information, see Filter.Set target set the feature or waypoint, which is c
on the map screen, as the navigation ticon appears over the selected featureFor more information, see Set target /
Use this option … to …
453b
r on the map screen. Selectppears. Select a searcharison operator, and attribute
m to start the search. The firstearch criteria is highlighted. Ifn also appears.
p screen. Select the Layersyers:
ed in the current data file. Whened on the map screen.
stored on the GeoExplorer 3.displayed on the map screen.
at shows the path you haveof dots is displayed on the mapimum of 60 positions. Olddded.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 18: The Map ta
Search search among the features that appeathe Search option. The Search form adirection, feature type, attribute, compvalue to search for, then close this forfeature on the map that matches the sthe cursor is active, feature informatio
For more information, see Search.Layers specify the layers displayed on the ma
option. A checklist appears with the la
• Feature – Displays the features storthis is selected, features are display
• Waypoint – Displays the waypointsWhen this is selected, waypoints are
• GPS trail – Displays a trail of dots thtaken. When this is selected, a trailscreen. The trail shows up to a maxpositions drop off as new ones are a
Use this option … to …
454b
rail of small crosses that shows (see Log between features).
that are updated. For line andtart point. For more
ected except GPS trail.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 18: The Map ta
Layers (continued) • Between feature GPS – Displays a tall positions logged between feature
• Updated – Displays a ✓ on featuresarea features the ✓ appears at the sinformation, see The Update tab.
NOTE By default, all layers are sel
Use this option … to …
NAV section – IntroductionGeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference 455
THE NAV SECTIONTHE NAV SECTIONTHE NAV SECTIONTHE NAV SECTIONUse the NAV section to navigate to features and waypoints. Each tab in the NAV section providesyou with a different way of navigating. With the Road tab, you navigate using a road screen; withthe Compass tab, you use a compass; and with the Chart tab, you use a map to navigate to afeature or waypoint. Choose the navigation method that suits your current situation or personalpreference.
Press n to move between the tabs in the NAV section.
The NAV section has three tabs:
NOTE The Chart tab is not available with the GeoExplorer 3c edition.
• The Road tab • The Compass tab • The Chart tab
456b
ive. The road navigation screen
ou may not be able to drive
• Info windows
navigate to targets and toation about your location relativeof the target.
to view the Road option list.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceNAV section – 19: The Road ta
19191919 The Road tabThe Road tabThe Road tabThe Road tabn / Road
To display the Road tab, press n until the Road tab is actappears:
The Road screen contains:
WARNING The Road tab displays a straight line bearing to the target. Ydirectly to a target using this tab as a source of direction.
• Current position • Target name
Use this tab todisplay informto the location
Press mCurrent
Info windows
Target name
position
457b
cation relative to the target.ight ahead, towards the top of
rget you are navigating to. A.t the bottom of the screen) toInfo window is only displayedmore information about
ption list.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceNAV section – 19: The Road ta
Item DescriptionCurrent position The person symbol represents your lo
The person symbol always heads strathe screen. This is your heading.
Target name The target name is the name of the ta“?” appears when no target is selected
Info windows You can configure the Info windows (aprovide navigational information. Theif one or more items are selected. Forconfiguring Info windows, see Road o
458b
, select a target.
ars:
ate feature option list, or Map
• None
ature or a waypoint as your
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceNAV section – 19: The Road ta
Using the Road tabUse The Road tab to navigate to targets. To activate navigation
To select a target press E . The Select target screen appe
The Select target screen has three buttons:
NOTE You can also select a target using the Road option list, Updoption list.
• New • List
Use this screen to select a fetarget.
459b
e you to it. The graphical displaythe screen shows what action isnavigational information that you
op of the screen.
creen. When you are off course,kwise or counter-clockwise) that
mation displayed in this screeno the selected target.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceNAV section – 19: The Road ta
When you select a target, the Road screen animates to navigatshows where you are and where the target is. The animation ofrequired. The Info windows, at the bottom of the screen, displaycan use to navigate to the target.
The heading, or direction you are going, is always towards the t
When you are on course, the road is displayed vertically in the sthe road is skewed (at an angle) on the screen. The angle (clocthe road is turned depends on how far off course you are.
Road centerline
Target
Use the inforto navigate t
Target name
Info windows
Current position
460b
:
son symbol will be ahead of the
ventually the target moves awayyou have reached the target by
een you and the target.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceNAV section – 19: The Road ta
If you are seriously off course, the screen will look similar to this
If you are moving in the opposite direction to the target, the pertarget symbol.
As you move closer to the target, the road width increases and efrom the edge towards the center of the screen. You know thatusing the Distance in the Info windows. This is the distance betw
461b
d the road screen will graphicallyff the road this means that youance between the start point and
ters Close-up mode. As youbar and a proximity alarmd indicates its distance from you,een as you approach the target.is directly over the target symbol.
s example, the X-Track Infow is shown (the default Infows are Distance, Road Signelocity).
t which Info windows are shown,fo windows.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceNAV section – 19: The Road ta
In situations where a start waypoint or feature has been specifiedisplay the cross-track error. When the person symbol moves ohave moved away from the line that represents the shortest distthe target. The following screen appears:
When you are within 15 meters of the target, the road screen enenter Close-up mode, a target icon appears briefly in the statussounds. In this mode the position of the target symbol on the roaand it moves towards the person symbol in the center of the scrWhen you have reached the target position, the person symbol
NOTE In thiwindowindoand V
To sesee In
462b
t sound again unless you moveove back within the 15-meter
tting the beep volume to Off in
his button, the New waypointinformation, and press
vigates you to the target. Fortab.and features on the
waypoint, and press e .ou to the target. For more
are those stored in the openis open, no features are
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceNAV section – 19: The Road ta
NOTE Once you enter Close-up mode, the proximity alarm does noto a position more than 20 meters from the target and then mrange, or you select a different target.
TIP You can turn off the proximity alarm, and all other sounds, by sethe SYS section. For more information, see Configurations.
Use this button … to …New enter a new target. When you select t
form appears. Enter the new waypointe . The screen animates and namore information, see Using the Road
List select a target from a list of waypointsGeoExplorer 3. Highlight a feature orThe screen animates and navigates yinformation, see Using the Road tab.
NOTE Features available in the listdata file. When no data fileavailable in this list.
None indicate that no target is selected.
463b
• New waypoint
• Select start
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceNAV section – 19: The Road ta
Road option listn / Road / mPress m to view the available options.
The options are:
• Info windows • Select target
• Edit waypoints • Delete waypoints
• Road scale
464b
tion screen, select the InfoA checklist appears:
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceNAV section – 19: The Road ta
Info windowsn / Road / m / Info windows
To configure the Info windows display at the bottom of a navigawindows option from the option list (Road, Compass, or Chart).
465b
it. To add an item to the display,To remove an item from the
e items displayed, first removen is displayed at the bottom ofou can only display one other
roll up and down to see them
• Heading
• Current time
tes • Altitude
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceNAV section – 19: The Road ta
The items are:
When an item is selected there is a ✓ in the check box besidehighlight it, and press E . A ✓ appears in that check box.display, highlight it, and press E . The ✓ disappears.
NOTE You can display zero, one, two, or three items. To change ththose currently selected. If you select no items, no informatiothe navigation screen. If you select Coordinates or Go N/E, yitem.
NOTE Not all items in the checklist fit on the screen at one time. Scall. Checklists scroll in a cyclical fashion.
• Distance • Road sign • Bearing
• Turn • Cross track • Velocity
• Arrive in • ETA • Coordina
• Go N/E • Go up
466b
rrent GPS position and thedistance to the target,rget is selected, the value
. If no target is selected, the
ngle that you should follow torrent GPS position and thee displayed is N/A.or, if you are stationary, the
GeoExplorer 3 handheld.give an accurate heading, soeading can be displayedselected.
d the heading. The directionjust your heading (left or right)lected, the value displayed is
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceNAV section – 19: The Road ta
Checklist item This item displays …Distance the distance remaining between the cu
target. This is the shortest great-circlecomputed on your local datum. If no tadisplayed is N/A.
Road sign the direction in which you need to turnvalue displayed is N/A.
Bearing the bearing to the target. This is the atake the shortest path between the cutarget. If no target is selected, the valu
Heading the direction in which you are travelingdirection in which you are pointing theWhen you are stationary, GPS cannotthe internal digital compass is used. Hwhether or not a target or start point is
Turn the difference between the bearing anyou need to turn to face the target. Adby the amount shown. If no target is seN/A.
467b
st line between the start pointght) is indicated by “←” ordistance you need to travel inen you are on track, you areen you are off track, the personcenterline. The distance away
s how far off track you are.ay the cross track. When nolue displayed is N/A.into account change in
The velocity can be displayedselected.
oExplorer 3 data collectioning the Formats form. Theor not a target or start point is
target. This value takes yours a larger value if you are noto target is selected, the value
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceNAV section – 19: The Road ta
Cross track the direction and distance of the shorteand the target. The direction (left or ri“→”. The numeric value indicates thethat direction to get back on track. Whtraveling straight towards the target. Whsymbol appears some distance from thefrom the centerline (left or right) indicateSelect a start point and target to displstart point or target is selected, the va
Velocity your current velocity. This value takesaltitude as well as horizontal velocity.whether or not a target or start point is
Current time the current time configured on the Gesystem. Configure the current time uscurrent time can be displayed whetherselected.
Arrive in the time remaining until you reach thecurrent heading into account and showheading directly towards the target. If ndisplayed is N/A.
Checklist item This item displays …
468b
et. This is based on the Arriveet is selected, the value
ate system that is displayedigure the coordinate system,s can be displayed whether orWhen the GeoExplorer 3 isvalue displayed is N/A.e current altitude value is still
nd east component. If nois N/A.e target. If no target is
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceNAV section – 19: The Road ta
ETA the expected time of arrival at the targin time and the Current time. If no targdisplayed is N/A.
Coordinates the current GPS position. The coordindepends on the configuration. To confuse the Coordinates form. Coordinatenot a target or start point is selected.unable to compute GPS positions, the
Altitude your altitude. If no target is selected, thdisplayed.
Go N/E the direction to the target as a north atarget is selected, the value displayed
Go up the vertical distance (up or down) to thselected, the value displayed is N/A.
Checklist item This item displays …
469b
the option list (Road, Compass,
• None
ature or a waypoint as your
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceNAV section – 19: The Road ta
Select targetn / Road / m / Select target
To select a target waypoint, choose the Select target option fromor Chart). The Select target screen appears:
The Select target screen has three buttons:
• New • List
Use this screen to select a fetarget.
470b
waypoint. When a new waypointe is GPS and the suffix is a three-ple, GPS004. When a newursor and the suffix is a three-
ple, Cursor017.
changes. Pressfe to
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceNAV section – 19: The Road ta
New waypointn / Road / m / New waypoint
To create a new waypoint, select the New waypoint optionfrom the option list (Road, Compass, or Chart). The Newwaypoint form appears:
Use this form to enter new waypoint information. The Newwaypoint form requires Text entry and Numeric entry.
Press m to display the Here option. Use the Hereoption to automatically update the Lat, Lon, and Altitude fieldswith the current GPS position.
The GeoExplorer 3 automatically generates a name for the newis created using the current GPS position, the prefix for the namdigit number (starting at 000 for the first one created). For examwaypoint is created using the cursor, the prefix for the name is Cdigit number (starting at 000 for the first one created). For exam
When you have completed data entry, presse to save theclose the form and abandon any changes.
NOTE The GeoExplorer 3 handheld can store 1,000 waypoints.
471b
ypoint information. The Editt entry and Numeric entry.
Here option. Use the Herete the Lat, Lon, and Altitude
position.
data entry, presse to saveto close the form and
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceNAV section – 19: The Road ta
Edit waypointsn / Road / m / Edit waypoints
To edit a waypoint, select the Edit waypoints option from theoption list (Road, Compass, or Chart). An Edit waypoints listappears:
This list shows all waypoints on the GeoExplorer 3 datacollection system. Select the one to be edited. The Editwaypoints form appears.
Use this form to edit the wawaypoint form requires Tex
Press m to display theoption to automatically updafields with the current GPS
When you have completedthe changes. Pressfeabandon any changes.
472b
elete waypoints list.
Delete all option. Use the Deleteints stored on the GeoExplorer 3.
ion does not delete a waypointart or target.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceNAV section – 19: The Road ta
Delete waypointsn / Road / m / Delete waypoints
To delete a waypoint, select the Delete waypoints option fromthe option list. A Delete waypoints list appears:
This list shows all waypoints on the GeoExplorer 3 datacollection system. Select the one to be deleted. You areprompted to confirm the deletion.
A waypoint that is set as the start or target cannot be deleted,and cannot be selected from the list.
Select Yes to delete thewaypoint indicated.
Select No to go back to the D
Pressm to display theall option to delete all waypo
NOTE The Delete all optif it is set as the st
473b
ption list (Road, Compass, or
• None
aypoint or feature that you want
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceNAV section – 19: The Road ta
Select startn / Road / m / Select start
To select a start point, choose the Select start option from the oChart). The Select start screen appears:
The Select start screen has three buttons:
• New • List
Use this screen to select the wto start navigating from.
474b
target. If no start point isis displayed as N/A.
s a bold diamond ( ) symbol.
ct this button, the
ailable waypoints and features
are those stored in the openis open, no features are
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceNAV section – 19: The Road ta
NOTE You do not have to select a start point before navigating to aspecified, some navigational information in the Info windows
NOTE A start point is displayed in the Road, Chart, and Map tabs a
Use this button … to …New enter a new waypoint. When you sele
New waypoint form appears.List select the start point from the list of av
on the GeoExplorer 3 handheld.
NOTE Features available in the listdata file. When no data fileavailable.
None indicate that there is no start point.
475b
e the Road scale option from theyou want to follow a path when
nt to stay close to the path youon track is less important, set a
, the road
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceNAV section – 19: The Road ta
Road scalen / Road / m / Road scaleTo change the scale of the Road screen that is displayed, choosRoad option list. Set the road scale according to how accuratelynavigating between a start and a target. For example, if you waare traveling, set a small road scale, for example, 10. If stayinglarger road scale, for example, 90.
In this example, the roadscale is set to 90.
And in this examplescale is set to 10.
476ss tab
ab is active. The Compass tab
• Compass rose
combined internal and GPSe it to orient yourself, and totarget.
to view thetion list.
hen you receive youroExplorer 3 the internalmpass may require Calibration.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceNAV section – 20: The Compa
20202020 The Compass tabThe Compass tabThe Compass tabThe Compass tabn / Compass
To display the Compass tab, press n until the Compass tappears:
The Compass screen contains:
• Your heading • Current position
• Target name • Info windows
This tab is acompass. Usnavigate to a
PressmCompass op
NOTE WGeco
Current
Target name
Info windows
Yourheading
position
Compass rose
477ss tab
direction or heading.relative to the target. Your
ards the top of the screen).irection in which you are
f the target you are navigatingpears.the bottom of the screen to
Info window is only displayedmore information aboutdows.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceNAV section – 20: The Compa
Item DescriptionYour heading The top of the compass indicates yourCurrent position The + symbol represents your location
heading is always straight ahead (towCompass rose The compass rotates to indicate the d
heading.Target name The target name indicates the name o
to. When no target is selected a “?” apInfo windows You can configure the Info windows at
provide navigational information. Theif one or more items are selected. Forconfiguring Info windows, see Info win
478ss tab
ets. The bearings are calculated3 automatically switches
heading at all times, whether you
ence.
compass the GeoExplorer 3 is
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceNAV section – 20: The Compa
Using the Compass tabUse The Compass tab to orient yourself and to navigate to targby an internal compass and GPS information. The GeoExplorerbetween these at a certain velocity. This provides an accurateare moving or stationary.
The compass always points towards the configured North refer
The type of compass that is displayed indicates which mode ofusing. The GPS compass is the more detailed one.
GPS compass
Internalcompass
479ss tab
p of the GeoExplorer 3 data isaccuracy of 1 in 8; that is, it can
ill accurately display all compass
ct a target pressE . The
• None
target.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceNAV section – 20: The Compa
When the internal compass is being used, make sure that the tolevel, to give an accurate reading. The internal compass has andisplay the eight main compass headings. The GPS compass wheadings.
To navigate to a target, first select a feature or waypoint. To seleSelect target screen appears:
The Select target screen has three buttons:
NOTE You can also select a target using the Compass option list.
• New • List
Use this screen to select the
480ss tab
ide of the compass diagram.
u selected appears as a crossed-ithin the compass diagramaring to the target to navigate toents the direction to the target
urrent direction (heading).
ding. To change this, see Info
reen to navigate to the target.
indows at the bottom of thelay information that you can useto the target.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceNAV section – 20: The Compa
When a target is selected, the target symbol appears on the ins
The top of the compass shows your heading. The target that yoflag symbol on the inside of the compass diagram. Its position windicates the bearing to the target. Use your heading and the bethe target. Navigate by lining up the target symbol, which repres(bearing), with the top of the compass, which represents your c
NOTE The default Info windows are Distance, Road Sign, and Heawindows.
Target
Target name
Current position
Info windows
Use this sc
The Info wscreen dispto navigate
481ss tab
rs Close-up mode. As you enterd a proximity alarm sounds. Thex. In this mode the position offrom you, and it moves towards
u have reached the targetmbol.
t sound again unless you moveove back within the 15-meter
tting the beep volume to Off in
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceNAV section – 20: The Compa
When you are within 15 meters of the target, the compass enteClose-up mode, a target icon appears briefly in the status bar ancurrent position symbol in the center of the compass changes tothe target symbol within the compass rose indicates its distancethe center of the compass as you approach the target. When yoposition, the center of the compass is directly over the target sy
NOTE Once you enter Close-up mode, the proximity alarm does noto a position more than 20 meters from the target and then mrange, or you select a different target.
TIP You can turn off the proximity alarm, and all other sounds, by sethe SYS section. For more information, see Configurations.
482ss tab
t this button, thethe new target information,ates and you can use it to
ist of available waypoints andight a waypoint or feature, andure becomes the new target.avigate to the target.
ist are those stored in theata file is open, no features
ected.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceNAV section – 20: The Compa
Use this button … to …New enter a new target. When you selec
New waypoint form appears. Enterand press e . The screen animnavigate to the target.
List select the target waypoint from the lfeatures in the GeoExplorer 3. Highlpress E . The waypoint or featThe screen animates and you can n
NOTE Features available in the lopen data file. When no dare available.
None indicate that there is no target is sel
483ss tab
screen.
• New waypoint
• Select start
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceNAV section – 20: The Compa
Compass option listn / Compass / mPress m to display the available options for the Compass
The options are:
• Info windows • Select target
• Edit waypoints • Delete waypoints
• Calibration
484ss tab
GeoExplorer 3 compass at lowthe internal compass. To do this:
erence. Calibrating the internal
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceNAV section – 20: The Compa
Calibrationn / Compass / mLocal changes in magnetic fields can affect the accuracy of thespeeds. To take account of local conditions, you must calibrate
1. Highlight Calibration in the Compass options list andpress E. The following screen appears:
2. Follow the instructions and make sure that the antenna ofthe GeoExplorer 3 is level. The antenna is located in thetop portion of the unit under the Trimble logo.
3. PressE, and as the countdown takes place, rotatesmoothly through a full circle.
For best results you should finish facing in the directionthat you started from. A message will be displayedindicating if calibration is successful.
NOTE The compass always points towards the configured North refcompass does not change the north reference.
485
b
n.
rt tab is active. The Chart screen
is tab to navigate to waypointsatures.
m to display theoption list.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceNAV section – 21: The Chart ta
21212121 The Chart tab The Chart tab The Chart tab The Chart tabNOTE The Chart tab is not available with the GeoExplorer 3c editio
n / Chart
To display the navigation Chart tab, pressn until the Chaappears:
Use thand fe
PressChart
North
ScaleTarget
indicator
position
Waypoint
Info windows
GPS trail
name
Target
CurrentStart
486
b
Use the Map tab, in the DATAem as targets. Use the Chart
ts.
ows • North indicator
me • Waypoint
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceNAV section – 21: The Chart ta
The Chart screen displays:
NOTE There are two map screens available on the GeoExplorer 3.section, to view, select, and update features as well as set thtab, in the NAV section, to navigate to features and waypoin
• Current position • GPS trail • Info wind
• Scale • Target • Target na
• Start • Features
487
b
ur current GPS position. Theou are heading.
as in the currently open data
t shows the path you have
screen provide navigationaltab is Current time andws configuration, use thenly displayed if one or more
reen. As you zoom in/out the
rrently set as the start. Whentted line is drawn betweeneen them.urrently set as the target.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceNAV section – 21: The Chart ta
Item DescriptionCurrent position The current position cross indicates yo
arrow points in the direction in which yFeatures Features are the points, lines and are
file.GPS trail The GPS trail displays a trail of dots tha
taken.Info windows The Info windows at the bottom of the
information. The default for the ChartCoordinates. To change the Info windoChart option list. The Info window is oitems are selected.
North indicator The “N” arrow indicates north.Scale The scale indicates the scale of the sc
scale changes accordingly.Start The start is the feature or waypoint cu
a start and target are configured, a dothem indicating the shortest path betw
Target The target is the feature or waypoint c
488
b
f the target you are navigatingppears.osition of the waypoints
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceNAV section – 21: The Chart ta
Target name The target name indicates the name oto. When no target is selected, a “?” a
Waypoint The waypoint symbol represents the pstored on the GeoExplorer 3.
Item Description
489
b
). To activate navigation, select a
rs:
e cursor. For more information,
• None
get that you want to navigate to.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceNAV section – 21: The Chart ta
Using the Chart tabUse the Chart tab to navigate to targets (waypoints and featurestarget.
To select a target, pressE . The Select target form appea
The Select target form has three buttons:
NOTE You can also select a target using the Chart option list or thsee Using the cursor.
• New • List
Use this form to select the tar
490
b
you navigate to it. The chartS trail positions, the target, theta collection system. The Infoy relevant information, or
e cross and arrow symbol) toe current position arrow is
se the information displayed one Chart screen to navigate toe selected target.
ordinates
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceNAV section – 21: The Chart ta
When you select a target, the chart displays information to helpgraphically displays your current position, your heading, the GPbearing to the target, and all waypoints on the GeoExplorer 3 dawindows at the bottom of the screen can be configured to displaremoved completely to increase the chart size.
In this example, you are navigating from the current position (thtarget GPS000 (the cross-flag symbol). The direction in which thpointing indicates your current heading.
Uthth
Target
Current position
Current position co
and direction
Target
Waypoint
of travel
name
491
b
en, a bearing to the target arrowto the target, line up your currentrget, the current position symbolen the current position symbol is
ale of the chart. In the exampleand select Zoom in, Zoom
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceNAV section – 21: The Chart ta
When the scale is set so that the target is not visible on the screis displayed from your current position to the target. To navigateheading with the bearing to the target. As you get closer to the tagets closer to the target symbol. You have reached the target whover the top of the target symbol.
The scale bar at the bottom of the chart screen indicates the scabove, the scale of the screen is 200 m. To change this, pressmout, or Zoom extents.
For more information, see Chart option list.
492
b
ove the cursor diagonally, presslose to the edge of the chart, the. The cursor remains in the same
tially appears over the target. Iflected, the cursor appears in thecreen.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceNAV section – 21: The Chart ta
Using the cursorUse the cursor to select targets and create new waypoints.
To activate the cursor, press an arrow key. The cursor appears:
To move the cursor around the screen, press an arrow key. To mtwo arrow keys at the same time. When the cursor moves too cchart automatically pans in the direction of the cursor movementgeographic position.
CursorThe cursor inino target is secenter of the s
Cursor coordinates
Cursor symbol
493
b
Info windows, these coordinatesoordinates indicates whether thecurrent GPS position of the
nt GPS position of the cursor.
e displayed), the symbol for thatdisplayed beside it. As you moveppear.
waypoint (or feature) isarget form appears with the
to accept the waypoint or
will pan the map one screenremains in the same position on
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceNAV section – 21: The Chart ta
When the cursor is visible and coordinates are displayed in thereflect the current cursor position. The symbol to the left of the ccoordinates shown are for your current GPS position ( ) or thecursor ( ). In the example above, the symbol shows the curre
NOTE You cannot pan across the screen if the cursor is not visible.
When the cursor is close to a waypoint or feature (if features arwaypoint is highlighted. In addition, the name of the waypoint isthe cursor away from the waypoint, the name and highlight disa
To select a target using the cursor, press an arrow key until thehighlighted and the name appears. Press E . The Select tselected waypoint or feature highlighted in the list. PressEfeature that is highlighted. It becomes the new target.
To remove the cursor, press e .
TIP To pan the screen, press f and one of the arrow keys. Thiswidth in the direction of the arrow key you pressed. The cursorthe screen, not in the same geographic position.
494
b
ew waypointhere you want to create a newt the New button. The New
w waypoint.
e Chart tab.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceNAV section – 21: The Chart ta
Using the cursor to create a nUse the arrow keys to move the cursor to a place on the chart wwaypoint. Press E . The Select target form appears. Selecwaypoint form appears. Use it to enter information about the ne
For more information about the Select target form, see Using th
495
b
ents • Info windows
oint • Edit waypoints
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceNAV section – 21: The Chart ta
Chart option listn / Chart / mPress m to display the Chart options.
The options are:
• Zoom in • Zoom out • Zoom ext
• Pan/select • Select target • New wayp
• Delete waypoints • Select start • Layers
496
b
his magnifies the display byhe bottom of the screenr is active, the screen zoomsnot active, the screen zooms
This lets you see a greaterale at the bottom of the screenr is active, the screen zoomsursor is not active, the screenS position.splays all selected layers. Theg to the layers selected and
, the Zoom extents option
ttom of the screen.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceNAV section – 21: The Chart ta
Use this option … to …Zoom in zoom in to the chart screen.
Press m and select Zoom in. Tdecreasing the scale. The scale at tadjusts accordingly. When the cursoin on the cursor. When the cursor isin on the current GPS position.
Zoom out zoom out of the chart screen.Press m and select Zoom out.area by increasing the scale. The scadjusts accordingly. When the cursoout relative to the cursor. When the czooms out relative to the current GP
Zoom extents change the scale so that the chart diZoom extents option varies accordinwhether the features are filtered.If nothing is displayed on the screendoes not affect the chart scale.
Info windows configure the Info windows at the bo
497
b
screen in the direction of thethe cursor to select features
lect a waypoint or a feature as
can select a waypoint or a
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceNAV section – 21: The Chart ta
Pan/select activate the on-screen cursor.Use the on-screen cursor to pan thecursor movement. You can also useand waypoints on-screen.
Select target access the Select target screen. Sethe target.
New waypoint create a New waypoint.Edit waypoints access the Edit waypoints screen.Delete waypoints access the Delete waypoints list.Select start access the Select start screen. You
feature as the start point.
Use this option … to …
498
b
hart. Select the Layers option.g layers:
tored in the open data file.displayed on the chart.
ts stored on the GeoExplorer 3.re displayed on the chart.
that shows the path you haveimum of 60 positions. Oldadded.
figured (see Log betweenthat show all positions logged
s that are updated. For line andstart point. For more
.
res in the data file that is
default except Updated.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceNAV section – 21: The Chart ta
Layers specify the layers displayed on the cA checklist appears with the followin
• Features – Displays the features sWhen this is selected, features are
• Waypoints – Displays the waypoinWhen this is selected, waypoints a
• GPS trail – Displays a trail of dotstaken. The trail shows up to a maxpositions drop off as new ones are
• Between feature GPS – When confeatures), a trail of small crossesbetween features is displayed.
Layers(continued)
• Updated – Displays a ✓ on featurearea features the ✓ appears at theinformation, see The Update tab
NOTE You can only display featucurrently open.
NOTE All layers are selected by
Use this option … to …
499
warewarewarewarelete GeoExplorer 3 orsers who want to:
rer 3 firmware option, or vice
new version
are
e
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide22: Installing the firmware
Reference
22222222 Installing the firmInstalling the firmInstalling the firmInstalling the firmYou do not need to install the firmware if you received the compGeoExplorer 3c data collection system. This section is only for u
• change the GeoExplorer 3c firmware option to the GeoExploversa
• upgrade the GeoExplorer 3 or GeoExplorer 3c firmware to a
• install or reinstall the GeoExplorer 3 or GeoExplorer 3c firmw
The following instructions cover:
• Equipment required for installation
• Upgrading the GeoExplorer 3c to GeoExplorer 3 firmwar
• Installing the GeoExplorer 3 or GeoExplorer 3c firmware
500
nstallationlorer 3 data collector, a programlash is an installation program.
3 firmware, from the Trimble webld Wide Web, contact your local
ctor you need the following
Windows 98, Windows 2000,al RS232 port and at least 10 MB
ter has a 25-pin serial port
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide22: Installing the firmware
Reference
Equipment required for iBefore installing the GeoExplorer 3 firmware onto your GeoExpcalled WinFlash must be installed on your office computer. WinFThe WinFlash software is available, along with the GeoExplorersite (www.trimble.com). If you do not have access to the WorTrimble dealer to receive the GeoExplorer 3 installation disks.
To use the WinFlash software with the GeoExplorer 3 data colleequipment:
• an IBM-compatible personal computer running Windows 95,Windows ME, or Windows NT, with at least one available seriof free hard disk space.
• your GeoExplorer 3 data collector
• a 9-pin to 25-pin converter (this is only required if your compuconnector on its COM1 or COM2 ports)
• Null modem cable
501
ernal source of power for thehe GeoExplorer 3. Alternatively,l clip, but you should make sure
Web)
efore you start to perform thesubstitute other equipment. Byctions provided in this section,If you use inappropriateu will be unable to install thee risk of erasing the currently increased. If this occurs, youing.
grade can be accomplished by3, it is recommended that youource of power. This preventsff a discharged battery.
have transferred any data filesfiles will be deleted.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide22: Installing the firmware
Reference
• a Trimble GeoExplorer 3 support module to provide an extinstallation process, rather than using the internal battery of tyou can upgrade the firmware using the GeoExplorer 3 Seriathat the internal battery is at least 50% charged.
• CD-ROM drive (if you do not have access to the World Wide
CAUTION It is crucial that you have all of the equipment listed above boption upgrade or to install the firmware. Do not attempt tousing the recommended equipment and following the instruyou will be able to quickly and reliably perform the process.equipment, or fail to follow the instructions, it is likely that yofirmware or upgrade the options successfully. In addition, thfirmware in your GeoExplorer 3 without replacing it, is greatmay need to return your GeoExplorer 3 to Trimble for servic
Although the GeoExplorer 3 firmware installation and option upusing power from the internal lithium battery of the GeoExploreruse the Trimble GeoExplorer 3 support module as an external saccidental termination of the installation process while running o
CAUTION Before you start the installation process, make sure that youand waypoints to your office computer. If you do not, these
502
rer 3c to
the GeoExplorer 3 support
he GeoExplorer 3 lithium battery)
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide22: Installing the firmware
Reference
Upgrading the GeoExploGeoExplorer 3 firmwareFollow the instructions below to perform either of the following:
• an Option upgrade with an external power source (usingmodule)
• an Option upgrade with the internal power source (using t
503
al power
dule as an external power
nstallation:
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide22: Installing the firmware
Reference
Option upgrade with an externsourceTo perform an option install using the GeoExplorer 3 support mosource:
1. Connect the equipment listed in Equipment required for i
504
t (mains).
r COM2 serial port of yourr 18532).
er 3 support module.
ot already on. Check the Statuspowered externally:
ding with the option upgrade.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide22: Installing the firmware
Reference
2. Plug the GeoExplorer 3 support module into the wall curren
3. Connect the GeoExplorer 3 support module to the COM1 ocomputer using the supplied null modem cable (part numbe
4. Place your GeoExplorer 3 data collector into the GeoExplor
5. Turn on the GeoExplorer 3 and office computer if they are nscreen on the GeoExplorer 3 to make sure the unit is being
You are now ready to option upgrade the firmware. See Procee
505
nal power
ium battery as the power source:
the rear of the GeoExplorer 3
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide22: Installing the firmware
Reference
Option upgrade with the intersourceTo perform an option install using the GeoExplorer 3 internal lith
1. Connect the serial clip (part number 38595-00) to swipes ondata collector.
506
32) to the serial clip. Connect theerial port of your computer.
ot already on. Check the Statuspowered internally:
ding with the option upgrade.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide22: Installing the firmware
Reference
2. Connect one end of the null modem cable (part number 185other end of the null modem cable to the COM1 or COM2 s
3. Turn on the GeoExplorer 3 and office computer if they are nscreen on the GeoExplorer 3 to make sure the unit is being
You are now ready to option upgrade the firmware. See Procee
507
grade
on and select Reset. The
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide22: Installing the firmware
Reference
Proceeding with the option upTo proceed with the option upgrade:
1. On the GeoExplorer 3, go to the Setup tab in the SYS sectifollowing menu appears:
508
ction. You can begin the option
this, from the Windows Start
, which is used to install thetor, must be installed on yourwant to install. The WinFlashm www.trimble.com, or
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide22: Installing the firmware
Reference
2. Select Upgrade firmware. You will be asked to confirm this aupgrade when the following screen appears:
3. On your office computer, start the WinFlash software. To domenu select Programs / WinFlash / WinFlash.
NOTE For the firmware upgrade to proceed, the WinFlash programGeoExplorer 3 firmware onto your GeoExplorer 3 data collecoffice computer, along with the GeoExplorer 3 firmware youprogram and GeoExplorer 3 firmware can be downloaded froinstalled from the installation CD.
509
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide22: Installing the firmware
Reference
A dialog similar to the following appears:
4. Select GeoExplorer 3 Data Collector as the device type.
510
nnected to.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide22: Installing the firmware
Reference
5. Specify the serial (COM) port that your GeoExplorer 3 is co
6. Click Next. The Operation Selection dialog appears:
511
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide22: Installing the firmware
Reference
7. Select the Option upgrade option and click Next.
The following dialog appears:
512
ovided by Trimble and click Next.
lar to the following:
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide22: Installing the firmware
Reference
8. Enter the password exactly (including matching case) as pr
The GeoExplorer 3 Firmware Selection dialog appears simi
513
oExplorer 3 and click Next.
:
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide22: Installing the firmware
Reference
9. Select the firmware version you want to install onto your Ge
The Settings Review dialog appears similar to the following
514
nitiates communication with the
ress status of the firmware
fer of the GeoExplorer 3
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide22: Installing the firmware
Reference
10. Review the current settings and click Finish. The program iGeoExplorer 3.
A dialog similar to the following appears, indicating the proginstallation:
The installation takes about five minutes. Typically, the transfirmware to the data collector proceeds automatically.
515
pears on your computer:
wly installed firmware.
fying the new GeoExplorer 3
the GeoExplorer 3 once it hasou may need to return your
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide22: Installing the firmware
Reference
When the installation has completed, the following dialog ap
11. Click Exit to close the WinFlash program.
12. Your GeoExplorer 3 reboots and automatically starts the ne
The Trimble logo screen appears just after rebooting, identifirmware and also showing the firmware version number.
WARNING Do not stop the option upgrade process on the computer orstarted. Doing so may corrupt the firmware. If this occurs, yGeoExplorer 3 to Trimble for servicing.
516
r 3 or
e onto the GeoExplorer 3 datato install a new version of the
nternal power source, as
sing the GeoExplorer 3 support
sing the GeoExplorer 3 lithium
tents of the GeoExplorer 3 datapoints are transferred to your
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide22: Installing the firmware
Reference
Installing the GeoExploreGeoExplorer 3c firmwareThis section describes how to install the GeoExplorer 3 firmwarcollector. (You should also follow these instructions if you wantGeoExplorer 3c firmware.)
You can perform the installation using either an external or the idescribed in the following sections:
• Installing the firmware using an external power source (umodule)
• Installing the firmware using the internal power source (ubattery)
CAUTION The firmware installation process completely erases the concollector’s memory. Make sure that all data files and waycomputer before installing the firmware.
517
n external
upport module as an external
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide22: Installing the firmware
Reference
Installing the firmware using apower sourceTo install the GeoExplorer 3 firmware using the GeoExplorer 3 ssource of power:
1. Connect the equipment listed inEquipment required for installation:
2. Plug the GeoExplorer 3 supportmodule in to the wall current (mains).
3. Connect the GeoExplorer 3 supportmodule to the COM1 or COM2 serialport of the computer using the suppliednull modem cable (part number18532).
4. Place your GeoExplorer 3 datacollector into the GeoExplorer 3support module.
518
ady on. Check the Status screend externally:
the installation.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide22: Installing the firmware
Reference
5. Turn on the GeoExplorer 3 and computer if they are not alreon the GeoExplorer 3 to make sure the unit is being powere
You are now ready to install the firmware. See Proceeding with
519
he internal
attery of the GeoExplorer 3 as
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide22: Installing the firmware
Reference
Installing the firmware using tpower sourceTo install the GeoExplorer 3 firmware using the internal lithium bthe power source:
1. Connect the equipmentlisted in Equipmentrequired for installationas shown in the followingdiagram:
2. Connect one end of the nullmodem cable (part number18532) to the serial clip.Connect the other end ofthe null modem cable to theCOM1 or COM2 serial portof your computer.
520
ot already on. Check the Statuspowered internally:
the installation.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide22: Installing the firmware
Reference
3. Turn on the GeoExplorer 3 and office computer if they are nscreen on the GeoExplorer 3 to make sure the unit is being
You are now ready to install the firmware. See Proceeding with
521
nt. The following menu appears:
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide22: Installing the firmware
Reference
Proceeding with the installatio1. On the GeoExplorer 3, go to the Setup tab and select Rese
522
on. Begin the option upgrade
this, from the Windows Start
re, which is used to install thetor, must be installed onto yourwant to install. The WinFlashm www.trimble.com, or
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide22: Installing the firmware
Reference
2. Select Upgrade firmware. You are asked to confirm this actiwhen the following screen appears:
3. On your office computer, start the WinFlash software. To domenu select Programs / WinFlash / WinFlash.
NOTE For the firmware installation to proceed, the WinFlash softwaGeoExplorer 3 firmware onto your GeoExplorer 3 data collecoffice computer, along with the GeoExplorer 3 firmware youprogram and GeoExplorer 3 firmware can be downloaded froinstalled from the installation CD.
523
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide22: Installing the firmware
Reference
A dialog similar to the following appears:
4. Select GeoExplorer 3 Data Collector as the device type.
524
nnected to.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide22: Installing the firmware
Reference
5. Specify the serial (COM) port that your GeoExplorer 3 is co
6. Click Next. The Operation Selection dialog appears:
525
lar to the following:
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide22: Installing the firmware
Reference
7. Select the Firmware upgrade option and click Next.
The GeoExplorer 3 Firmware Selection dialog appears simi
526
oExplorer 3 and click Next.
:
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide22: Installing the firmware
Reference
8. Select the firmware version you want to install onto your Ge
The Settings Review dialog appears similar to the following
527
nitiates communication with the
ress status of the firmware
fer of the GeoExplorer 3
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide22: Installing the firmware
Reference
9. Review the current settings and click Finish. The program iGeoExplorer 3.
A dialog similar to the following appears, indicating the proginstallation:
The installation takes about five minutes. Typically, the transfirmware to the data collector proceeds automatically.
528
pears on your computer:
wly installed firmware.
fying the new GeoExplorer 3
omputer or the GeoExplorer 3is occurs you may need to return
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide22: Installing the firmware
Reference
When the installation has completed, the following dialog ap
10. Click Exit to close the WinFlash program.
11. Your GeoExplorer 3 reboots and automatically starts the ne
The Trimble logo screen appears just after rebooting, identifirmware and also showing the firmware version number.
WARNING Do not stop the firmware installation process on the office conce it has started. Doing so may corrupt the firmware. If thyour GeoExplorer 3 to Trimble for servicing.
529
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide23: SpecificationsReference
23232323 SpecificationsSpecificationsSpecificationsSpecificationsThe following tables detail the pinouts for the:
• GeoExplorer 3 serial clip
• GeoExplorer 3 support module
• Null modem cable
• Data/power splitter cable
• RTCM/NMEA splitter cable
530
-00):
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide23: Specifications
Reference
GeoExplorer 3 serial clipThis table lists the pinouts for the serial clip (part number 38595
DB9 pin # Clip pin # Signal
1 EXT IN
2 3 TXD1 →3 2 RXD1 ←4 NC
5 6 GND
6 NC
7 8 RXD2 ←8 7 TXD2 →9 9 NC
531
odule38604-00):
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide23: Specifications
Reference
GeoExplorer 3 support mThis table lists the pinouts for the support module (part number
DB9 pin # Module pin # Signal
1 EXT IN
2 3 TXD1 →3 2 RXD1 ←4 NC
5 5 GND
6 NC
7 8 RXD2 ←8 7 TXD2 →9 9 NC
532
er 18532):
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide23: Specifications
Reference
Null modem cableThis table lists the pinouts for the null modem cable (part numb
Pin # Signal Pin # Signal
1 EVENT IN → 1 CD
2 TXD ← 3 RXD
3 RXD → 2 TXD
45 GND 5 GND
6 DSR ← 6 DSR
7 PWR ON → 8 RTS8 CHG CTRL → 7 DTR
533
number 39183):
le)
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide23: Specifications
Reference
Data/power splitter cableThis table lists the pinouts for the data/power splitter cable (part
Pin # P1 (DB9 Female) P2 (DB9 Male) P3 (Fema
1 GP10 NC -
2 RXA → RXA → -
3 TXA ← TXA ← -
4 NC NC -
5 GND GND GND
6 NC NC -
7 RTSA/TXB → RTSA/TXB → -
8 CTSA/RXB ← CTSA/RXB ← -9 EXT PWR NC EXT PWR
534
leart number 39142):
Pin # P2 (DE9 Male)
5 GND
3 TX2 ←2 RX2 →
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide23: Specifications
Reference
RTCM/NMEA splitter cabThis table lists the pinouts for the RTCM/NMEA splitter cable (p
Pin # P3 (DE9 Female) Pin # P1 (DE9 Male)
2 RX1 → 2 RX1 →3 TX1 ← 3 TX1 ←5 GND 5 GND
7 TX2 ←8 RX2 →9 9
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Troubleshooting 535
V: V: V: V: TROUBLESHOOTINGTROUBLESHOOTINGTROUBLESHOOTINGTROUBLESHOOTINGThis section lists potential problems and describes how to solve them. It also lists the messagesthat can appear on the screen of the GeoExplorer 3 handheld. Each list is arranged inalphabetical order.
• Potential problems
• GeoExplorer 3 messages
536
sssse GeoExplorer 3 data collector.
s.
en postprocessing
e incorrect
e minute of being turned on
tes of being turned on
fter being turned on
s expected
eceiver with the GeoExplorer 3
24: Potential problemsGeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Troubleshooting
24242424 Potential problemPotential problemPotential problemPotential problemListed here are problems that you may encounter when using thSelect one from the list to view its possible causes and solution
• Automatically generated Time attributes are incorrect
• Cannot differentially correct the rover GPS positions wh
• Coordinates displayed by the GeoExplorer 3 appear to b
• GeoExplorer 3 is not displaying a GPS position within on
• GeoExplorer 3 is not tracking satellites within three minu
• GeoExplorer 3 will not turn on, or turns off immediately a
• The GeoExplorer 3 screen is hard to read
• The internal compass does not appear to be working
• The precision of recorded GPS positions is less than wa
• The real-time differential correction link is not working
• You are having problems using Beacon-on-a-Belt (BoB) r
537
rect
e Time zone field (in themenu).
generated file names areUTC time, not local time.
outside and check that it canlite.r 3 is not tracking satellitesf being turned on.
24: Potential problemsGeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Troubleshooting
Automatically generated Time attributes are incor
Possible cause FixThe internal clock of theGeoExplorer 3 is set incorrectly.
Reset it by adjusting thFormats configuration
NOTE Automaticallyderived from
The GeoExplorer 3 has notreceived GPS time yet.
Take the GeoExplorer 3track at least one satelIf not, see GeoExplorewithin three minutes o
538
ons when postprocessing
t the Elevation mask on theh. The rover must only usevisible to the Base station.
re other Base files collectedt base file.
use Base station data from
e Base file is started befored stopped after the rover file
24: Potential problemsGeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Troubleshooting
Cannot differentially correct the rover GPS positi
Possible cause FixThe rover unit used satellites thatwere not visible to the basestation.
In future make sure tharover is set high enougsatellites that are also
The Base station file started toolate or too soon.
Check to see if there aadjacent to your currenorCheck to see if you cananother provider.orIn future, make sure ththe rover is started, anhas been closed.
539
ar to be incorrect
e sure that the correct datum
ify the correct zone and
mmonly used in the USA:3.
ify the correct coordinatee units.ordinate systems.
More...
24: Potential problemsGeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Troubleshooting
Coordinates displayed by the GeoExplorer 3 appe
Possible cause FixYou are using the Latitude/Longitude coordinatesystem and have selectedthe wrong datum.
Check Coordinates and makis selected.
You are using the UTMcoordinate system and haveselected the wrong UTMzone or datum.
Check Coordinates and specdatum.
NOTE Two datums are coNAD-27 and NAD-8
You have selected thewrong coordinate system,zone, or coordinate units.
Check Coordinates and specsystem, zone, and coordinatFor more information, see Co
540
ordinate system, datum, and/that values such as the scale(as a parts-per-million value),the correct sense (a positive
), and that Latitudes andhe correct hemisphere (North/ively).
24: Potential problemsGeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Troubleshooting
You have defined a customcoordinate system, datum,and/or zone incorrectlyusing the CoordinateSystem Manager in the GPSPathfinder Office software.
Check the definition of the coor zone carefully. Make surefactor are specified correctlythat rotations are specified inrotation is counter-clockwiseLongitudes are specified in tSouth or East/West, respect
Possible cause Fix
541
ithin one minute of being
ar view of the sky
o check that there arehis time, and that they are not
to adjust the configured GPS
o check that the current PDOPigured mask.
to adjust the configured GPS
More...
24: Potential problemsGeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Troubleshooting
GeoExplorer 3 is not displaying a GPS position wturned on
Possible cause FixNot enough satellites areavailable. A minimum of four isrequired to compute GPSpositions.
Ensure you have a cleorUse mission planning tsufficient satellites at tobstructed from view.orUse the GPS slider barprecision.
The current PDOP value is toohigh. (The geometry of thesatellite constellation is poor)
Use mission planning tvalue is below the conforUse the GPS slider barprecision.
542
to check if the Mode field isnly. When the GeoExplorer 3only and there is no real-time
are displayed or recorded.
24: Potential problemsGeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Troubleshooting
There is no real-time link. Use the Real-time formconfigured for RTCM ois configured for RTCMlink, no GPS positions
Possible cause Fix
543
ee minutes of being
tion and move away from it.y be a building, tree, or
not work indoors.
ab or Status bar to make suretenna is connected andthe GeoExplorer 3 still fails totenna and/or antenna cable
viced.
rnal antenna is not workingeoExplorer 3 reverts to the
ntenna.
More...
24: Potential problemsGeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Troubleshooting
GeoExplorer 3 is not tracking satellites within thrturned on
Possible cause FixSatellites are being obstructed. Identify the obstruc
The obstruction mavehicle.
NOTE GPS does
The external antenna (or antennacable) has not been connected, hasbeen connected incorrectly, or isfaulty.
Check The Status tthat the external anworking properly. Iftrack signals, the anmay need to be ser
NOTE If the exteproperly Ginternal a
544
inutes) until therds an Almanac.
24: Potential problemsGeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Troubleshooting
The almanac is too old. TheGeoExplorer 3 has not recorded andstored a current almanac.
Wait (for up to 15 mGeoExplorer 3 reco
Possible cause Fix
545
iately after being turned
ower source or use an
of the system.
24: Potential problemsGeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Troubleshooting
GeoExplorer 3 will not turn on, or turns off immedon
Possible cause
Possible cause FixThe internal power source is notcharged.
Recharge the internal pexternal power source.
The GeoExplorer 3 firmware haslocked up and is not responding toany keys.
Perform a Warm boot
546
direct sunlight and wait untilal.
vel. Use the The Status tab oral power is low, recharge theower source with the
.
ness.
24: Potential problemsGeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Troubleshooting
The GeoExplorer 3 screen is hard to read
Possible cause FixThe screen has been left indirect sunlight.
Remove the handheld fromthe screen returns to norm
The GeoExplorer 3 internalpower source is low.
Check the internal power lethe Status bar. If the internbattery or use an external pGeoExplorer 3 handheld.
The screen display contrastneeds adjusting.
Adjust the Screen contrast
The screen backlight needsadjusting.
Adjust the Backlight bright
547
ing
from the Compass option list
o be held with the antennaplay accurate readings. Thele logo.
24: Potential problemsGeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Troubleshooting
The internal compass does not appear to be work
Possible cause FixThe compass has not beencalibrated, or needs to bere-calibrated.
Use the Calibration optionto calibrate the compass.
The GeoExplorer 3 is notbeing held in a level position.
The GeoExplorer 3 needs tlevel for the compass to disantenna is under the Trimb
548
han was expected
o increase the minimumquired (for a point feature).
ctions, such as buildings andto record features. Use anilable.
for use with postprocessingder Office Differential
, use the Velocity filter optionf multipath.
ar.
More...
24: Potential problemsGeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Troubleshooting
The precision of recorded GPS positions is less t
Possible cause FixYou did not record sufficientpositions to achieve the requiredprecision (for a point feature).
Use Feature settings tnumber of positions re
You are operating in an area ofhigh multipath interference.
Move away from obstrutrees, and use Offsetsexternal antenna if avaorLog velocities records(using the GPS PathfinCorrection utility).orIf operating in real-timeto reduce the effects o
The GPS slider bar is set too low. Adjust the GPS slider b
549
or move the GPS slider to the
k and/or Elevation mask orthe right.
.
ble, specify a minimum of fourompute a 3D position. Smallin the 2D altitude can lead to
r horizontal inaccuracy.
24: Potential problemsGeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Troubleshooting
The PDOP mask is too high. Lower the PDOP maskright.
The SNR mask and/or Elevationmask is too low.
Increase the SNR masmove the GPS slider to
The GeoExplorer 3 is configuredto use a minimum of threesatellites and the 2D altitudespecified is not accurate.
Change the 2D altitude
NOTE Where possisatellites to cinaccuraciesmuch greate
Possible cause Fix
550
rking
the Status bar to check ifre being received. Make sureappropriate cable for the radionnected properly. If in doubt,outs (see GeoExplorer 3
o change the RTCM input andlt the documentation for yourrameters.
setting.
More...
24: Potential problemsGeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Troubleshooting
The real-time differential correction link is not wo
Possible cause FixThe RTCM connection is notconnected, has been connectedincorrectly, or is faulty.
Use The Status tab orreal-time corrections athat you are using theand that the cable is cocheck the serial clip pinserial clip).
The RTCM communicationparameters are configuredincorrectly.
Use the COMMS form toutput settings. Consuradio for the correct pa
The Station ID is incorrect. Change the Station ID
551
ake sure the RTCM input fieldB. Also, check that the BoBbled for cable-free
information, refer to the) Receiver Manual.
splitter is not being used inNMEA output off.
24: Potential problemsGeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Troubleshooting
The GeoExplorer 3 is notreceiving corrections from theBoB receiver via the cable-freelink.
In the COMMS form mis set to Cable-free Boreceiver has been enatransmission. For moreBeacon-on-a-Belt (BoB
NMEA output is set to the samedevice as RTCM input.
When the RTCM/NMEAthe COMMS form, turn
Possible cause Fix
552
(BoB) receiver with the
sing the BoB receiver with the
Beacon-on-a-Belt (BoB)
o change the frequency beinge corrections.
3 closer to the BoB receiver.
24: Potential problemsGeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Troubleshooting
You are having problems using Beacon-on-a-BeltGeoExplorer 3
NOTE There may be other reasons why you are having problems uGeoExplorer 3.
For more information, refer to the troubleshooting section in theReceiver Manual.
Possible cause FixThe BoB receiver is set to thewrong frequency.
Use the BoB receiver tused to receive real-tim
The BoB receiver is too far awaywhen operating using thecable-free link.
Move the GeoExplorer
553
ssagesssagesssagesssagesrmation messages that may beiven to help you avoid seeing
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Troubleshooting25: GeoExplorer 3 messages
25252525 GeoExplorer 3 meGeoExplorer 3 meGeoExplorer 3 meGeoExplorer 3 meThis section lists the GeoExplorer 3 error, confirmation, and infodisplayed, and their causes. Where relevant, suggestions are gthese messages in the future.
• Error!
• Please confirm...
• Other messages
554
gs
ange the mode. You cannot viewode. To change mode, use the
elect Standard.
oints stored on thewaypoints using the option list inwant to save any waypoints first,
a data file is open
ta file is open or data transfer isis completed, then attempt the
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Troubleshooting25: GeoExplorer 3 messages
Error!Cannot change mode with custom settin
While in the Custom mode of the GPS slider bar, you tried to chthe Standard mode of the GPS slider bar if you are in Custom marrow keys to highlight the slider bar. Then press m and s
Cannot exceed 1000 waypoints
You attempted to create a waypoint when the limit of 1000 waypGeoExplorer 3 had been reached. You can delete unnecessarythe The Road tab, The Compass tab, or The Chart tab. If youyou can transfer them to your office computer.
Compass calibration cannot proceed ifor data transfer is occurring
You are attempting to calibrate the internal compass while a daoccurring. Close any open data files and wait until data transfercalibration.
555
cannot be deleted
the GeoExplorer 3. Delete the
ntly open for edit int complete any changes, then
ory than is available on thery Editor utility in the GPSata Dictionary Editor utility, refer
file. All file names and identifiersr lower) is not significant when
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Troubleshooting25: GeoExplorer 3 messages
<Dictionary file name> is in use and
A data dictionary cannot be deleted if it is used by a data file ondata file before deleting the dictionary.
Data dictionary currently in use
You have tried to open a file using a data dictionary that is curreThe Setup tab. To open a file using this dictionary you must firsclose the dictionary, before opening your file.
Data dictionary too large to edit
You have tried to open a data dictionary that requires more memGeoExplorer 3. To edit the data dictionary use the Data DictionaPathfinder Office software. For more information on using the Dto the GPS Pathfinder Office Help.
Duplicate file names are not allowed
You have attempted to give a file the same name as an existingon the GeoExplorer 3 must have a unique name. Case (upper ocomparing two names.
556
ithin the specified range.
d
have not entered one.
successful. Make sure that theis enough memory on
r was unsuccessful. Make surend that there is enough memory
g transferred to your officecomputer. Either cancel the dataete before opening/deleting the
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Troubleshooting25: GeoExplorer 3 messages
<field>: out of range “min” to “max”
The number entered is too large or too small. Enter a number w
<field/attribute name>: Entry require
You are editing a field or attribute that requires a value, but you
Failed to load configuration file
The transfer of a configuration file to the office computer was unconfiguration file is valid and it contains no errors, and that thereGeoExplorer 3.
Failed to load coordinate system
The transfer of a coordinate system file from the office computethat the coordinate system file is valid and contains no errors, aon the GeoExplorer 3.
File in use by data transfer
You have attempted to open or delete a file that is currently beincomputer or is being overwritten by an transfer from your officetransfer from your office computer or wait until transfer is compldata file.
557
tion
ounds of the configuredve selected the appropriatethe coordinate correctly (pay
custom coordinate system and/um, and/or zone correctly.
in the correct format as
in the correct format ashour format. If using the 12 hour
when less than 10 KB of dataemory is left. To create memory
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Troubleshooting25: GeoExplorer 3 messages
Inappropriate location for map projec
You have entered a coordinate (North/East) that is outside the bcoordinate system zone. Use Coordinates to check that you hacoordinate system and zone. Make sure that you have enteredparticular attention to the hemisphere—N, S, E, or W). If using aor zone, make sure that you defined the coordinate system, dat
Invalid date
The date entered is invalid. Make sure that you entered the dateconfigured in Formats.
Invalid time
The time entered is invalid. Make sure that you entered the timeconfigured in Formats. You can enter time in either the 12 or 24clock, remember to specify pm if the time is after midday.
Memory nearly full
This warning message appears if you try to create or open a filestorage space remains. Use The Status tab to see how much mspace, use The File tab to delete data files.
558
arge
displayed on the GeoExplorer 3.
If this message appears, youcoordinate system.
fore upgrading
low power supply. To proceedower connected. The upgrade
res based on logging time, andect Start and End times.
ed. Typically, three windows canlected you can only display onebefore closing the list.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Troubleshooting25: GeoExplorer 3 messages
<number>: Floating point number too l
The numeric value entered in a field is too large to be stored or
The GeoExplorer 3 can store and display large numeric values.have probably entered a wrong value or coordinate in the wrong
Please charge the internal battery be
You are attempting to upgrade the firmware while the unit has awith the upgrade, place the unit in the support module with the pcan take place when the power level has reached 10%.
Start time is later than end time
This message appears when the GeoExplorer 3 is filtering featuthe specified End time is not later than the Start time. Enter corr
Too many info windows selected
You have selected more Info window options than can be displaybe displayed at once. However, if Coordinates or Go N/E are seother Info window. Reduce the number of Info windows selected
559
eek old
ago. Create a new data file to
a file is open
ata file is open. Before enteringkey in the DATA section to close
, presso to place the
t coordinate system
the boundaries of the currentappropriate coordinate systemPay particular attention to the
and/or zone, make sure thatrrectly.
te system transferred from theM coordinate systems have aOffice Help.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Troubleshooting25: GeoExplorer 3 messages
Unable to append to a file over one w
You attempted to log data to a file created more than one weekcollect data.
Unable to go to standby mode if a dat
You have attempted to place the unit in Standby mode while a dStandby mode all data files must first be closed. Use theeany open features and then the file itself. Once the file is closedGeoExplorer 3 in Standby mode.
Warning! Position is out of the currenboundaries
You attempted to enter or display a geographic position outsidecoordinate system. Use Coordinates to see if you selected theand zone. Make sure that you entered the coordinate correctly.hemisphere—N, S, E, or W. If using a custom coordinate systemyou have defined the coordinate system, datum, and/or zone co
This message is most likely to appear when you use a coordinaGPS Pathfinder Office software, as the default Lat/Long and UTglobal scope. For more information, refer to the GPS Pathfinder
560
d. Operation not
y the office software. Thee password, check the passwordutility.
n that can be displayed by the
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Troubleshooting25: GeoExplorer 3 messages
You have entered an incorrect passworallowed.
The field you have tried to change has been password locked bpassword you have entered is incorrect. If you have forgotten thsettings for your Configuration file in the Configuration Manager
Zoom limit reached
You have reached the maximum or minimum zoom magnificatiomap or chart.
561
r form. Select No to cancel the
x but retain any other loggedosition.
en. Select No to cancel the close
lts?
factory default values. Select No
ile (base or rover) is open. If youset the values.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Troubleshooting25: GeoExplorer 3 messages
Please confirm...Abandon changes?
Select Yes to discard any changes made to the open attribute ooperation and return to the form without losing your changes.
Abandon vertex?
Select Yes to abandon the positions logged for the current verteinformation. Select No to resume logging the averaged vertex p
Close rover file?
Select Yes to close and save the rover file you currently have opoperation and leave the rover file open.
Close file and reset to factory defau
Select Yes to reset the GeoExplorer 3 data collection system toto cancel the operation.
The GeoExplorer 3 cannot be reset to factory defaults if a data fselect Yes, the GeoExplorer 3 will close the file first and then re
562
plorer 3. Select No to cancel the
d on the GeoExplorer 3. Select
the operation.
the operation.
e>?
ancel the operation.
e operation.More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Troubleshooting25: GeoExplorer 3 messages
Delete all?
Select Yes to delete all waypoints that are stored on the GeoExoperation.
NOTE If a waypoint is set as the start or target, it is not deleted.
Delete all files?
Select Yes to delete all data files (rover and base) that are storeNo to cancel the operation.
Delete attribute <attribute name>?
Select Yes to delete the selected attribute. Select No to cancel
Delete base file <filename>?
Select Yes to delete the selected base file. Select No to cancel
Delete dictionary <dictionary filenam
Select Yes to delete the selected data dictionary. Select No to c
Delete feature <feature name>?
Select Yes to delete the selected feature. Select No to cancel th
563
operation.
l the operation.
operation.
the operation.
stance: Replace GPS
t position is further from theing distance. Select Yes toelect No to cancel the operation.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Troubleshooting25: GeoExplorer 3 messages
Delete geoid?
Select Yes to delete the specified geoid. Select No to cancel the
Delete rover file <filename>?
Select Yes to delete the selected Rover file. Select No to cance
Delete value <value name>?
Select Yes to delete the selected value. Select No to cancel the
Delete waypoint <waypoint name>?
Select Yes to delete the selected waypoint. Select No to cancel
Distance to feature exceeds warning didata anyway?
You are updating the GPS position of a feature and your currenfeature’s previously recorded position than the configured Warnoverwrite the previous position with the current GPS position. S
564
will delete all
in Upgrade mode for installationalling new firmware will delete allpgrade and return to
red to the PC:
puter. If you delete it from thee selected file. Select No to
ase data, and the amount of datae the file. Select No to continue
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Troubleshooting25: GeoExplorer 3 messages
Enter upgrade mode? (Firmware upgradedata files)
Select Yes to enter Upgrade mode. The GeoExplorer 3 must beof different firmware versions using the WinFlash software. Instfiles on the GeoExplorer 3. Select No to abandon the firmware uThe Setup tab.
File <filename> has not been transferDelete anyway?
The selected data file has not been transferred to the office comGeoExplorer 3, it will not be recoverable. Select Yes to delete thcancel the operation.
Insufficient carrier: Close anyway?
You have attempted to close a data file that is logging carrier phrequired (10 minutes) has not been collected. Select Yes to closcollecting carrier-phase data.
565
nt to store this
GeoExplorer 3 could record theature anyway. Select No to
nt to store this
xplorer 3 could record theanyway. Select No to continue
t to abandon this
xplorer 3 could record any GPSthe vertex open to record GPS
except Latitude/Longitude and
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Troubleshooting25: GeoExplorer 3 messages
Insufficient GPS positions: Do you wafeature now?
You have attempted to close the current point feature before theconfigured Minimum positions. Select Yes to store the point fecontinue collecting positions for the selected feature.
Insufficient GPS positions: Do you wavertex now?
You have attempted to close the current vertex before the GeoEconfigured Minimum positions. Select Yes to store the vertexcollecting positions for the vertex.
No GPS positions recorded: Do you wanvertex now?
You have attempted to close the current vertex before the GeoEpositions. Select Yes to abandon the vertex. Select No to keeppositions.
Reset coordinate systems?
Select Yes to remove all coordinates loaded on GeoExplorer 3,UTM. Select No to cancel the operation.
566
file. Select No to continue
ame>?
t GPS position. Select No to
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Troubleshooting25: GeoExplorer 3 messages
Stop base station?
Select Yes to stop logging base station data and close the baselogging data.
Update GPS data in feature <feature n
Select Yes to replace the previous GPS position with the currencancel the operation.
567
e compass screen without
heading under local conditions.ptions list. The internal compassns at low velocities. For more
close the message. For more
menu using this combination of
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Troubleshooting25: GeoExplorer 3 messages
Other messagesCalibration failed, Try again?
Select Yes to attempt calibration again. Select No to return to thcalibrating the compass.
Calibrate digital compass
The internal compass requires calibration to return an accurateTo calibrate the compass, select Calibration from the Compass oaffects the use of the Skyplot, Road, Chart, and Compass screeinformation, see Using the Compass tab.
Calibration successful
You have successfully calibrated the compass. PressE toinformation, see Using the Compass tab.
f + m to display the main menu
For an overview of the GeoExplorer 3 system, access the mainkeys.
568
ameters you specified.
osition is available. (This occurs,or.)
ified parameters.
further operation is suspendedels the current task.
closed properly because of a
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Troubleshooting25: GeoExplorer 3 messages
No match found!
The software cannot find a feature that matches the search par
Not found
No features matching the search criteria have been found.
OLD position
This message flashes over the GPS position if no current GPS pfor example, if there are too few satellites or the geometry is po
Please wait... Filtering
The GeoExplorer 3 is filtering the features according to the spec
Please wait... Processing
The GeoExplorer 3 has a large amount of processing to do anduntil the current task is completed. Pressing fe canc
Please wait... Rebuilding file
The GeoExplorer 3 is checking and repairing files that were notsudden power failure or similar event.
569
ecified parameters.
parameters.
igured on the GPS slider bar.
sition.
o the PC: Continue?
on the GeoExplorer 3 will beware upgrade. You may transfer
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Troubleshooting25: GeoExplorer 3 messages
Please wait... Searching
The GeoExplorer 3 is searching the features according to the sp
Please wait... Sorting
GeoExplorer 3 is sorting the features according to the specified
Poor geometry
The current satellite geometry does not meet the precision conf
The current PDOP is higher than the configured PDOP mask.
Remain stationary
Remain stationary while you are logging an averaged vertex po
Some files have not been transferred t
Select Yes to continue with the firmware upgrade. All data filespermanently deleted. Select No if you want to abandon the firmthe necessary files and then upgrade your firmware.
570
ion configured on the GPS slider
n the configured SNR mask.
son. If this message persistsserviced.
down power key to
f you have not done so already,Flash to upgrade the firmware ton the power keyo for
e entered for the current feature.
on form and then press e.
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Troubleshooting25: GeoExplorer 3 messages
Too few satellites
The number of satellites being tracked does not meet the precisbar.
There are too few satellites with an SNR value that is higher tha
Undefined GPS error
The GeoExplorer 3 is not tracking satellites for an unknown reaplease contact your Trimble dealer to have the GPS equipment
Upgrading firmware from WinFlash (Holdabort)
The GeoExplorer 3 is now able to communicate with Winflash. Iconnect the GeoExplorer 3 to your office computer and run Wina different version. If you want to abandon the upgrade hold dowapproximately 10 seconds. Restart using the power keyo.
Validating
The GeoExplorer 3 is validating the attribute values that you hav
This message also appears if you change fields in a configurati
571
vertex you collected.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Troubleshooting25: GeoExplorer 3 messages
Vertex open
You are currently logging an averaged vertex.
Vertex stored
This message confirms that you have now saved the averaged
572
real-time differential GPSrover
n RTCMtrue north
L) UTCUTMvelocityVTG messagewaypointWGS-84
ber
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Glossary
GLOSSARYGLOSSARYGLOSSARYGLOSSARYSelect a word from the following list to view its definition.
.cor file datum latitude
.imp file declination longitude
.ssf file differential correction magnetic declinatioalmanac ellipsoid magnetic northattributes feature Mean Sea Level (MSaveraged vertex geoid multipathbase station GGA message NAD-27baud great-circle distance NAD-83bearing HAE NMEAcarrier phase heading paritycode phase (C/A code) horizon postprocessingdata dictionary ionospheric noise pseudorandom num
573
tial Correction utility in the GPS
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Glossary
.cor fileA file with a .cor extension that has been created by the DifferenPathfinder Office software, but uses the .ssf file format.
574
rt utility in the GPS Pathfinder
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Glossary
.imp fileA file with an .imp extension that has been created by the ImpoOffice software, but uses the .ssf file format.
575
PS data from a mapping
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Glossary
.ssf fileA Trimble Standard Storage Format (SSF) data file that stores Greceiver.
576
es orbit information on all the. The almanac is stored on theignals when you turn theare trying to regain GPS signals.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Glossary
almanacAn almanac is data, transmitted by a GPS satellite, which includsatellites, clock corrections, and atmospheric delay parametersGeoExplorer 3. It is used to facilitate rapid acquisition of GPS sGeoExplorer 3 on, or when you have lost track of satellites and
577
formation System (GIS). Force type, width, or a number ofd could have a range of possible
tribute value. In our example of aute and ASPHALT could be the
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Glossary
attributesAttributes are the characteristics of a feature in a Geographic Inexample, a road may have a name or designation number, surfalanes. Each of these factors are attributes of the road feature, anvalues.
The value chosen to describe a particular feature is called the atroad feature, PINE ROAD could be the name value of the attribsurface type attribute.
578
ore GPS positions.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Glossary
averaged vertexA point on a line or area feature that is averaged from one or m
579
nown location specifically toollected at the same time as youtions that collect base data forwn coordinates for the duration
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Glossary
base stationA base station is a GPS antenna and receiver positioned on a kcollect data for differential correction. Base data needs to be ccollect data on a rover unit. Base stations can be permanent staprovision to multiple users, or a rover unit that you locate on knoof your datalogging session.
580
nsmissions, generally one bit per. However, both the input and
a to be successfully transferred.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Glossary
baudBaud is a unit used to measure the speed of electronic code trasecond. The higher the baud rate, the faster the transfer of dataoutput device must be configured to the same baud rate for dat
581
sured clockwise from north. Oncurrent position to the target
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Glossary
bearingA bearing is the direction from one point to another, usually meathe GeoExplorer 3, the bearing indicates the direction from yourwaypoint or feature.
582
enerated by your GeoExplorer 3r phase is used to very
the accuracy of your position.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Glossary
carrier phaseCarrier phase is the difference between the radio wave signal gand the radio wave signal coming in from the satellite.The carrieaccurately compute the distance to a satellite, which increases
GPS satellites transmit on a frequency of 1575.42 MHz.
583
erated by your GeoExplorer 3e. The code phase data is usedulate your position.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Glossary
code phase (C/A code)(also known as Course Acquisition code)
The difference between the pseudorandom number code genand the pseudorandom number code coming in from the satellitto quickly compute the distance to a satellite and therefore calc
584
or a particular project or job. It isute information about these, line, and area feature.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Glossary
data dictionaryA data dictionary is a description of the objects to be collected fused in the field to control the collection of the spatial and attribobjects. The elements of a data dictionary could include a point
585
eodetic datums are typicallyip between the center of the
ll provide a better model in someblished to suit particular regions.datum of 1950 (ED-50).
More...
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Glossary
datumA datum is a mathematical model of the earths surface. World gdefined by the size and shape of an ellipsoid and the relationshellipsoid and the center of the earth.
Because the earth is not a perfect ellipsoid any single datum wilocations than others. Therefore, various datums have been estaFor example, maps in Europe are often based on the European
586
an datum of 1927 or 1983-84 datum surface.
ral Reference, or see
Datum fittingNorth America
rface
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Glossary
Maps in the United States are often based on the North Americ(NAD-27, NAD-83). All GPS coordinates are based on the WGS
For more information, refer to the GPS Mapping Systems GeneCoordinate systems.
Earth’s su
Datum fittingEurope
EuropeNorth
America
587
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide GlossarydeclinationSee magnetic declination.
588
lected on a rover with datanown location, any errors in datary corrections applied to the
S or after the data has been
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Glossary
differential correctionDifferential correction is the process of correcting GPS data colcollected simultaneously at a base station. Because it is on a kcollected at the base station can be measured, and the necessarover data.
Differential correction can be done in real-time differential GPcollected by postprocessing.
589
matically modeling the earthsmajor axes. The earths minor
ral Reference, or see
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Glossary
ellipsoidAn ellipsoid is the 3D shape that is used as the basis for mathesurface. The ellipsoid is defined by the lengths of the minor andaxis is the polar axis and the major axis is the equatorial axis.
For more information, refer to the GPS Mapping Systems GeneCoordinate systems.
minoraxis
major axis
590
real world, and about which youcan be divided into points, linesis a line feature and a lake is an
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Glossary
featureA feature is a physical object or event that has a location in thewant to collect position and/or descriptive information. Featuresand areas. For example, a water faucet is a point feature, a roadarea feature.
Features are defined in a data dictionary.
591
was projected to extend throughmetrical surface, the geoid
ral Reference, or see
Ellipsoid
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Glossary
geoidA geoid is a 3D surface representing mean sea level (MSL) if itthe continents. Unlike an ellipsoid or datum, which have a symundulates perpendicular to the force of gravity.
For more information, refer to the GPS Mapping Systems GeneCoordinate systems.
Geoid
Datum
592
sition, and “fix” (type of position)s from a GPS datalogger to
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Glossary
GGA messageA GGA message is a NMEA message containing GPS time, poinformation. GGA messages can be used to pass GPS positionmarine navigation equipment.
593
oints on the surface of a sphere.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Glossary
great-circle distanceThe great-circle distance is the shortest distance between two p
594
HAE are actually giving theeights are collected in relation toring altitudes in HAE.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Glossary
HAEHeight Above Ellipsoid
HAE is a method for referencing altitude. Altitudes expressed inheight above the datum. GPS uses the WGS-84 datum and all hthis surface. It is important to use the same datum when compa
595
measured clockwise from north.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Glossary
headingThe heading is the direction you are facing or traveling, usually
596
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide GlossaryhorizonThe line at which the earth and sky seem to meet.
597
here is the band of chargedabove the surface of the earth.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Glossary
ionospheric noiseThe effects that the ionosphere has on GPS signals. The ionospparticles 100 to 200 kilometers (60 to 125 miles approximately)
598
e earth to north or south of thelongitude coordinate system,
ed negative.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Glossary
latitudeLatitude is an angular measurement made from the center of thequator. It comprises the north/south component of the latitude/which is used in GPS data collection.
Traditionally, north is considered positive, and south is consider
599
the earth to the east or west ofst/west component of thecollection.
negative.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Glossary
longitudeLongitude is an angular measurement made from the center ofthe Greenwich meridian (London, England). It comprises the ealatitude/longitude coordinate system, which is used in GPS data
Traditionally, east is considered positive, and west is considered
600
nd true north. Declination is
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Glossary
magnetic declinationMagnetic declination is the difference between magnetic north aexpressed as an angle and differs between locations.
601
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Glossarymagnetic northUses the north magnetic pole as the reference to north.
602
es expressed in relation to MSL
in MSL.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Glossary
Mean Sea Level (MSL)Mean Sea Level (MSL) is a method of altitude reference. Altitudactually give a height above the geoid.
It is important to use the same geoid when comparing altitudes
603
ing traveled different paths. Forilding, before reaching theistance to the satellite and
ral Reference.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Glossary
multipathMultipath occurs when GPS signals arrive at the datalogger havexample, this may happen if some signals are reflected off a budatalogger. If a signal takes a longer path it will show a larger dtherefore decrease position accuracy.
For more information, refer to the GPS Mapping Systems Gene
604
he Clarke 1866 ellipsoid. Heightertical Datum) of 1929.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Glossary
NAD-27North American Datum of 1927. A horizontal datum employing tvalues of this era are expressed in NGVD (National Geodetic V
605
the GRS-80 ellipsoid. Itspurposes, the NAD-83 and
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Glossary
NAD-83North American Datum of 1983. A horizontal datum employinggeometric definition is almost identical to the WGS-84. For GPSWGS-84 datums are identical.
606
nics Association (NMEA). Theiming and sentence formats forruments.
rine navigation instruments.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Glossary
NMEANMEA is a standard, established by the National Marine Electrostandard defines electrical signals, data transmission protocol, tcommunicating navigation data between marine navigation inst
The GeoExplorer 3 uses these standards to communicate to ma
607
error checking that sums the 0’sf the bits is changed so that theat message transmission.
xplorer 3 as on the external
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Glossary
parityA digital message is composed of 0’s and 1’s. Parity is a form ofand 1’s of the digital message. A parity error results when one oparity calculated at message reception is not the same as it wasOptions for parity checking include even, odd, and none.
Typically you should have the same parity setting on your GeoEdevice you are communicating with.
608
n collected, in order to eliminaterover to data collected at the
be determined and removed
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Glossary
postprocessingPostprocessing is the processing of satellite data after it has beeerror. This involves using PC software to compare data from thebase station.
Because the base station is on a known location any errors canfrom the rover data.
609
smitted by GPS satellites, whichthat can be exactly reproduced.
used by the GeoExplorer 3 to
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Glossary
pseudorandom numberThe pseudorandom number (PRN) is the code of 0’s and 1’s tranappears to be random “noise”, but is actually a complex pattern
Each satellite has its own unique PRN code, which together arecalculate code phase (C/A code) positions.
610
a as you collect it. This ist to the data collector a fewposition it applies the corrections
e (C/A code) positions.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Glossary
real-time differential GPS(also known as real-time differential correction, DGPS)
Real-time differential GPS is the process of correcting GPS datachieved by having corrections calculated at a base station senseconds in advance using a radio link. As the rover receives theto give you a very accurate position in the field.
Real-time differential correction is usually applied to code phas
611
ta in the field, typically at ancorrected relative to base station
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Glossary
roverA rover is any mobile GPS datalogger collecting or updating daunknown location. Data collected on a rover can be differentiallydata.
612
e real-time differential correctional correction message. However,col.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Glossary
RTCMRadio Technical Commission for Maritime Services (RTCM)
A commission established to define a differential data link for thof roving GPS receivers. There are two types of RTCM differentiall Trimble GPS receivers use the newer version 2 RTCM proto
613
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Glossarytrue northUses the north celestial pole as the reference to north.
614
t the greenwich meridian (GMT).
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Glossary
UTCUniversal Time Coordinated.
UTC is a time standard based closely on local solar meantime aGPS time is directly related to UTC.
615
ted as UTM, it consists of 60
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Glossary
UTMUniversal Transverse Mercator Map Projection.
A special case of the Transverse Mercator projection. Abbrevianorth/south zones, each 6 degrees wide in longitude.
616
nt direction of travel as well as
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Glossary
velocityVelocity is essentially a measure of speed, that takes into accouthe distance traveled over a period of time.
617
ed over ground.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Glossary
VTG messageAn NMEA message containing actual track made good and spe
618
o attribute information beyond acts whose locations are often used for navigation.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Glossary
waypointA waypoint is a geographical point that, unlike a feature, holds nname and location. Typically waypoints are used to denote objeprimary interest, such as a survey mark. Waypoints are most of
619
GS-84 has superceded WGS-72
e.
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Glossary
WGS-84WGS-84 is an abbreviation for World Geodetic System 1984. Was the datum used by GPS since January 1987.
The WGS-84 datum is based on the ellipsoid of the same nam
GeoExplorer 3 Opera
A C S U W Y# B D R T V X Z
620
SymboNumero key1, 2, 4, 5 ke keyd keyE keyf keyl keyn keym keys key
finitionfinition
finition
n formn form (Custom option)h
INDEINDEINDEINDE
tion Guide Index
E G I K M O QF H J L N P
ls andics
eys
.cor file format, de
.imp file format, de
.ssf file format, de2D altitude
GPS precisioGPS precisioproblems wit
3D GPS position
XXXX
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
621
AabaAboAboacc
acc
add
st
n techniques
ns
r
field
date of
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
ndoning an averaged vertexut buttonut screenessories
information aboutoptionalstandard
uracy, GPSsetting for area featuressetting for line featuressetting for point features
ingattributefeaturevalue to an attribute
adjustingbacklightscreen contra
advanceddata collectiofunctionslogging optio
Advanced modeGPS slider baGPS tab
alarmturn offwhen sounds
Allow GPS updatealmanac
definitionoverviewwhere to view
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
622
altit
Altitangante
ante
area
nt features as wellw toa
PS Pathfinder Office, how to
yingying
ccuracyeters for allcuracyection toerval between logged GPS
w
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
udebase stationsetting referenceunits
ude info windowle units, settingnnagetting a clear view of the skyinternal, locationshowing type in usetype currently usedwhen to use an external antenna
nna heightbase stationenteringroverfeaturesSee also featurechanging settings for allcollecting averaged vertices for
collecting poicollecting, hocomputed arecontinuingcreating in Gdisplay unitslabels, displalabels, specifrepeatingsetting GPS asetting paramspecifying acspecifying dirspecifying int
positionsArrive in info windoattribute entry
formoption list
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
623
attri esusing GPS Pathfinder Officeattributes
xplained
rated time attributes,
ing
withs bar
ure
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
butesaddingauto-incrementingcopyingdate, creating using GPS Pathfinder Officedefinitiondeletingdisplayingentering valuesentering values quickly see text completionfiltering bymarking as defaultmenu
creating using GPS Pathfinder Officecreating with a default value using GPS
Pathfinder Officenumeric, creating using GPS Pathfinder Officesearch byshowing for featuresshowing in data dictionary
showing valutext, creating
auto-incrementingdefiningstep values eturn on or off
automatically genetroubleshooting
automatically pannChart screenMap screen
averaged verticesabandoningbegin featureicon on statuloggingnew vertexoverviewsavingupdating feat
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
624
BBacbac
bac
bas
htsfile
mation
al
data file
d
tilityorrecting data, how to
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
k button on Operation Guide CDkground files
renamingklight
adjustinghow to access settingsiconsettings
e data filescreatingdeletinginformation shown in message boxloggingnaming formulaopeningrenaming
base stationaltitudeantenna heigbase data filecreating basedefinitionentering inforformHere fieldlatitudelogging intervlongitudeopening baseoption listUnknown fielwaypoint
Base station fieldBatch Processor u
differentially c
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
625
batt
batt
batt
bau
bauBeaBea
(BoB) receiver
ter kit, part numbers
are
ngw
ngeacon-on-a-Belt (BoB) receiver
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
erycamcorder
eryBoB receivercamcorder (part number)external power kiticoninternal
ery levelBoB receiverinternal battery
d ratesetting (input)setting (output)
d, definitioncon healthcon mode, of BoB receiver
Beacon-on-a-Beltbattery levelBeacon modeequipment lisexternal powoverviewPC-BoB softwstatus oftroubleshooti
Bearing info windobearing to satellitebearing, definitionbeep volume, settiBoB receiver see BBr(M)Br(T)
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
626
butt get
start form)target form)
d file
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
onsAboutClose (Operation Guide CD)COMMSConfigurationsContents (Operation Guide CD)CoordinatesCreate new base fileCreate new fileData dictionariesFeatures settingsFormatsFwd (Operation Guide CD)GPSHelp (Operation Guide CD)LaterListList waypointsNewNew start point
New start tarNew targetNoneNone (SelectNone (SelectNowOpen selecteOtherUnits
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
627
CC/Acab
cabcab
calib
Calicam
adaptor cable
ingugh data
tellites neededsegata collectedtures
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
code see code phase (C/A code) datale-free BoB
descriptionRTCM input
lesles
camcorder power adaptorpower/data splittervehicle power adaptorrationaccuracy of magnetic fieldscompass, problems withinternal compass
bration screencorder batterypart number
camcorder powerCancel keycarrier phase data
benefits of uscollecting enocounting timedefinitionnumber of saplanning to upostprocessinprecision of drecording feasettingusing in files
carrying pouchcautions
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
628
cha
chaCha
ying
fore going into the fielddata collection)data update)r levellsw
peration Guide CD
to
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
ngingchart scale to display all selected layersconfigurationscoordinate orderdate formatdegrees formatinformation in info windowslanguagemap scalemap scale to display all selected layersoffsets formattime formattime zone
rt scale, changingrt screenautomatically panningoverviewspecifying layers to display
Chart tabinfo windowsoption listoverviewusing
check mark, displachecking
equipment beGPS status (GPS status (internal powememory leve
checklists, overvieclock informationClose (e) keyClose button on Oclose-up mode
Compass tabRoad tab
closing a file, how
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
629
cod
codcoldCollCollcolle
COMCOM
lng
ager utility
tog
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
e phase (C/A code) datadefinitionsetting to use
e phase databoot
ect base data formect new data formctingarea feature, how todata (tutorial overview)feature using the Later button, how toline feature, how topoint feature, how toMS buttonMS form
compasscalibrationheadingrosetarget symbotroubleshootitypes
Compass screenCompass tab
info windowsoption listoverviewusing
configurationchanginglocking
Configuration Manoverviewstarting, how
configuration settin
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
630
Concon
ConConConconcon
con
etting
nce
ystem Manager utilityg
on GeoExplorer 3
sferring
Manager utility
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
figurations buttonfiguring
coordinate systemselevation mask (GPS precision form)elevation mask (GPS precision form, Custom
option)PDOP mask (GPS precision form)PDOP mask (GPS precision form, Custom
option)SNR mask (GPS precision form)SNR mask (GPS precision form, Custom
option)nection Manager utilitytents button on Operation Guide CDtinue optiontinuing line and area featurestrast
decreasingincreasing
verting, GIS data to SSF format
coordinate order, scoordinate system
altitude referealtitude unitsconfiguringCoordinate Sdatum, settindatumsdefault geoidgeoidgeoid modelgrid files, tranLat/Longoverviewresettingselectingtransferringunitszone
Coordinate System
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
631
coocooCooCooCoocoocop
copCreCre
in GPS Pathfinder Officery using GPS Pathfinder Officery, New option
in GPS Pathfinder OfficegsGPS Pathfinder Office
e with a default value in GPSffice
es in GPS Pathfinder Officeta fileswith a date attribute in GPSfficeGPS Pathfinder Office
in GPS Pathfinder Office
indow
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
rdinate systems, supplied on the GeoExplorer 3rdinate unitsrdinates buttonrdinates form (Setup tab)rdinates info windowrdinates, troubleshootingying
attributesdata dictionaryfeaturesvalues
yrightate new base file buttonate new file button
creatingarea featuredata dictionadata dictionadata filedate attributefeature settinline feature inmenu attribut
Pathfinder Omenu attributnew base dapoint feature
Pathfinder Oproject usingrover data filetext attributewaypoints
Cross track info wcross-track error
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
632
curr
currCurcurs
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
ent GPS positionCompass tabGPS tabRoad screen
ent PDOP, viewingrent time info windowsormoving around the screenpanningturning offusing to create waypointsusing to select featuresusing to select features on mapusing to select waypoints
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
633
Ddata
DATdatadataDatdata
g GPS Pathfinder Officery Editor utility
tures
S Pathfinder Office, how to
GeoExplorer 3, how toitor utility
ncrementing attributes
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
advanced collection techniquescollectingdifferentially correctingpostprocessingtransferring from GeoExplorer 3updatingupdating, list of what you need to do
A (d) keybits, specifyingcollector case
a dictionaries buttondictionaryattributes, showingcopyingcreating using GeoExplorer 3
creating usinData Dictionadeletingdisplaying feagenericoption listoverviewrenamingsaving in GPselectingtransferring to
Data Dictionary Edsetting auto-i
Data formDATA section
diagramFile tabMap tab
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
634
data
Dat
data
data
date
dateOf
used
contrast
king asctorytting
ption
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
New taboverviewUpdate tabtransferspecifying the devicestatus
a Transfer utilityoverviewtransferring coordinate systemsupdatelist of what you need to dousing real-time differential corrections
/power splitter cablepinouts
feature was updatedformatattribute, how to create in GPS Pathfinder
fice
datumsavailabledefinitionoverviewsettingviewing datum
Declination fielddecreasing displaydefault
attribute, marresetting to fa
degrees format, seDelete file(s)
fieldlistoption list
Delete waypoints o
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
635
dele
DGPDGPdiffe
courseackarea featuresline featuresingad screen
es byfar you are from original featureowield
ey
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
tingattributesbase data filesdata dictionaryfeature from mapfeature from Update feature listfeaturesfilefiles, how torover filesvalueswaypointsS mode, viewing Status tab inS status
rentially correcting dataoverviewtroubleshootingusing the Batch Processor utility
directionon course/offon track/off trspecifying tospecifying toto offset, settviewing on ro
display contrastdecreasingincreasing
distanceformatsorting featurwarning how
Distance info windDistance to point fdots, trail of
Chart tabMap tab
down arrow (5) k
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
636
EEditEditEditEditEditedit
Elevelev
elevellip
htinformation
ributes
before going into the field
a GIS
conit, part numbersns, status ofpart numbers
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
configuration screendata dictionary formdata dictionary option listfeature settings listwaypoints option
ingattribute values for a featurefeature settingslocked fieldswaypoints
ation maskGPS precision formGPS precision form (Custom option)
ation, of satellitessoid, definition
Enter (E) keyentering
antenna heigbase stationnumberstextvalues for att
equipmentcheckingwhat to check
equipment listError rate fieldETA info windowExport utilityexporting, data toexternal antennaexternal antenna iexternal antenna kexternal connectioexternal power kit,
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
637
Ffactfeat
mapUpdate feature listtting informationte valuesg before minimum timeted featuresappears on map listesbels
ngngpdateds form (lines and area features)s form (point features), using Compass tab
b)gcting using the cursorilar
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
ory defaults, resettingure
See also area featuresSee also line featuresSee also point featuresabandoningaddingbeginning with averaged vertexclearing as targetcollecting positions before startingcollecting using the Later button, how tocontinuingcopyingdate updateddefinitiondeleting
deleting fromdeleting fromdisplaying seediting attribuending logginfiltering updafiltering whatglobal changinformation la
displayispecifyi
marking as uname settingname settingnavigating tonumberoffset (New taoffset, creatinon map, selerecording sim
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
638
as, for
, for
toow to
tory
to
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
recording using carrier phase datarepeatingsavingsearching for in Update feature listselecting using cursorselecting using the Map tabsetting area feature parameterssetting as targetsetting logging intervalsshowing attributes forshowing in data dictionarysorting by distancesorting by namesorting by time recordedspecifying accuracy for lines or areastime updatedupdating using Map tabviewingviewing GPS position
feature settingsbuttoncreatingdisplayingeditinglines and areoption listpoint features
filearea featuresclosingclosing, howcreate new, hcreatingcreating, howdata dictionadatedelete alldeletingdeleting, how
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
639
file
ase filefiles
filected file
plied
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
last updatedline featureslockingnameNot in feature positionsopeningopening base filepoint featuresrenamingsizestatustime
format.cor, definition.imp, definition.ssf, converted to.ssf, definition
File tabBase stationcreate new bcreating newdelete filesopening baseopening seleoption listoverviewrename files
filename prefixesfilter
removingshowing if ap
Filter applied field
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
640
filte
firm
flasflasFn kfontFormForm
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
ring featuresbased on
attribute valuescurrent statusnametime/date
on the map listremoving filters
wareinstallationstructure
hing number below satellite iconhing satellite iconey combinations
sats buttonats form
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
641
form
ly being trackedyeration Guide CD
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
sattribute entryBase stationCollect base dataCollect new dataCOMMSCoordinatesDataEdit data dictionaryFeature name settings (lines and areas)Feature name settings (point features)FormatsGPS precision (advanced)GPS precision (custom)New waypointOtheroverviewReal-timeSelect target (Chart tab)Select target (Road tab)
Set all areasSet all linesSet all pointsUnits
Free space fieldfrequency, currentFunction (f) keFwd button on Op
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
642
GgenGeo
ts
stsmessages
ar
ailableo the GeoExplorer 3
ionsttingghthootingto
port module
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
eric data dictionaryExplorer 3accessories, optionalaccessories, standardantenna heightcomponents
data collector pouchequipment listGeoExplorer 3 support moduleGPS Pathfinder Office softwarelanyardnull modem cableOperation Guide CDQuickStart quick reference cardserial clip
data collection system, explained
displayschecklisformslistsoption lipop-upscreensstatus bsublist
firmwarefree space avintroduction tkeysprimary functreceiver, resescreen backli
troublesturn on, howturning off
GeoExplorer 3 sup
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
643
Geogeo
geoGGGGGIS
globglosGoGo
nsosition updates
ffice softwarehow to createry, how to savery, how to transferry, overview, how to createow to createe with default value, how to
e, how to createute, how to create
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
Explorer 3c editionid
default geoid on GeoExplorer 3definitiondeletinggeoid, explainedmodelspecifying the geoid model
metryA message, definitionA message, specifyingdataconverting to SSF formatexporting to a GIStransfer to GeoExplorer 3, how toview, how to
al changes to a feature typesary links in Operation Guide CDN/E info windowup info window
GPS buttonGPS data
logging optionot allowing pupdating
GPS Pathfinder Oarea feature,data dictionadata dictionadata dictionadate attributeline feature, hmenu attribut
createmenu attributnumeric attriboverview
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
644
GPS
GPS
de
de
de
ing data collectioning data update
deto
gthde
ing
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
point feature with date attribute, how to createpoint feature, how to createprojectstext attribute, how to createPathfinder Office utilitiesConfiguration ManagerConnection ManagerCoordinate System ManagerData Dictionary EditorData TransferExportImportposition3Dcollecting before starting a featurecurrent, showing on compasstroubleshootingviewingviewing currentviewing quality of
GPS precision formAdvanced mocustom
GPS slider barAdvanced mocustomoverviewStandard mo
GPS statuschecking durchecking dur
GPS tabAdvanced modisplay, howoverviewsatellite strenStandard mo
GPS trailChart screen
grid files, transferr
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
645
HHAEhardhea
HeaHelpHerhomhori
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
, definitionware status
dingdefinitionin Road tabshowing on compass
ding info windowbutton on Operation Guide CD
e fielde button
zon, definition
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
646
Iicon
Imp
inco
contrast
rmation
n listcreen
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
sbacklightbatteryexternal antennainternal powerlockloggingMemoryon status barreal-time positionSatellitetarget
ort utilityoverviewstarting, how to
rrect coordinates
increasing displayinfo windows
AltitudeArrive inBearingchanging infoChart tabchecklistCoordinatesCross trackCurrent timeDistanceETAGo N/EGo upHeadingin Chart optioin compass s
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
647
info
inpuInpuinst
inte
inte
ng
en feature GPS positions/line featuret featuresGeoExplorer 3 data collection
definition
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
in Road tabRoad signTurnVelocity
rmation labelsdisplayingspecifying
t baud rate, specifyingt level field
allationchanging to a different versionequipment requiredGeoExplorer 3 or GeoExplorer 3c firmwareupdating the firmwareusing the WinFlash software
rnal antennalocationusing an external antenna instead
rnal battery
internal compasscalibrationtroubleshooti
internal power iconinterval
settingsetting betwe
for areafor poin
introduction to thesystem
ionospheric noise,
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
648
Kkey
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
s on GeoExplorer 3arrow keysCancelCloseDATAEnterFunction (Fn)LOGMenuNAVOPTIONpowerSYS
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
649
Llabe
langlanyLasLat/Late
latit
laye
uretings for alloraged vertices for
nt features as wellng the “before” techniquegth
oegments
yingyingame changes to a particular
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
lsdisplayingspecifying
uage, settingardt RTCM fieldLong coordinate systemr buttonoverviewuse, how to
udebase stationdefinition
rsselecting what to display on the chartspecifying what to display on the map
left arrow (2) keyleft keylegal informationline features
See also featchanging setcollect, how tcollecting avecollecting poicollecting usicomputed lencreate, how tdividing into slabels, displalabels, specifmaking the s
feature type
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
650
List
List
ettings
s)
ictionarysettings
re listrelative to the target
g
s and taskss using a password
res fieldld
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
Repeat optionrepeatingsegmentingsetting GPS accuracysetting parameters for allspecifying accuracyspecifying direction tospecifying interval between logged GPS
positions button
on Select start formon Select target form
waypoints button
listsDelete file(s)Edit feature soverviewpop-upRename file(ResetSelect data dSelect featureUpdate featu
location, displayingLock iconlocked fields, editinlocking
configurationconfigurationLock icon
Log (l) keyLog between featuLog PPRT data fie
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
651
logg
logg
logglogglogg
logg
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
ingaveraged verticesbase file datavelocity data
ing GPS dataoptionspausingresumingspecifying interval for line and area featuresspecifying interval for point featureswarning distance
ing GPS positionsing iconsing intervalbase stationfor line/area featurefor point feature
ing options, advanced
longitudebase stationdefinition
loss of locklow memory
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
652
Mmag
magMai
map
map
Update tab
SL)
ld
to
g GPS Pathfinder Office, how tovalue, creating using GPSffice
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
netic declinationdefinitionsetting
netic north, definitionn menu
overviewstructure
attributes, displaying in the Map windowscalespecifying layers to displaytypesscreenautomatically panningoverviewtypes
Map taboption listoverviewrelation to theusing
Mark fieldmean sea level (M
definitiongeoid
Measurements fiememory gaugeMemory iconmemory level
checking, howlow
menu attributescreating usinwith a default
Pathfinder OMenu key
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
653
menmes
mes
minminMin
modMor
eoExplorer 3 Operation Guideevel)
ataeffects ofl antenna
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
u structuresage boxbase file informationbelow listscarrier phase data informationcomputing GPS positionsdata transferfile informationoverview ofposition/summary
sagesSee also problemspop-up
imum number of positions for point featuresimum positions, specifyingimum satellites field
GPS precision formGPS precision form (Custom option)
ee... indicator on Operation Guide CD
movingaround the G
MSL (Mean Sea Lmultipath
definitionlog velocity dremoving theusing externa
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
654
NNADNADNAVNAV
nav
Compass tabompass tab
he Road screeng Compass tabuing line and area features
rt form (Compass tab)rt form (Road tab)et form (Compass tab)et form (Road tab)
ttontton
on
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
-27, definition-83, definition(n) keysectionChart tabCompass tabdiagramoverviewRoad tab
igatingaround the GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide
CDfrom a start point
navigating tofeature usingtarget using Ctarget using twaypoint usin
nesting See continNew button
on Select staon Select staon Select targon Select targ
New start point buNew start target buNew tab
option listoverview
New target buttonNew waypoint formNew waypoint opti
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
655
NM
NM
Non
Nor
NorNotnote
ature
, creating in GPS Pathfinder
nsic entry
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
EAdefinitionoutput interval, specifyingoutput, specifying the connection deviceoutputting, icon displayed
EA output optionsoffserial clipsupport module
e buttonon Select start formon Select start form (Compass tab)on Select target form (Compass tab)on Select target form (Road tab)
th indicator (N) fieldChart screenMap screen
th referencein features
Now buttonnull modem cable
pinoutsnumber, unique fenumbers, enteringnumeric attributes
Office, how tonumeric entry
multiple optiosingle numer
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
656
OobsOffoff coff toffs
offs
On
activating
button
file
y
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
tructions blocking satellite signals(o) keyourseracket
a feature, how tocreating for a new featurecreating for a updated featuresetting direction tosetting horizontal distance tosetting vertical distance to
etscreating for features on update listformatoverview
(o) key
on courseon trackon-screen cursor,
Chart screenMap screen
Open selected fileopening
base fileselected data
Operation Guidecontents ofintroduction
Option (m) ke
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
657
opti esGPS data
pecifyingignals
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
on listsAttribute entry formBase stationChart tabCompass tabcoordinatesData dictionariesDelete file(s)Edit data dictionaryEdit feature settingsFile tabGPS slider barGPS tabMap tabNew taboverviewRoad tabStatus tabUpdate attributeUpdate feature list
optional accessorioptions for loggingOther buttonOther formoutput baud rate, soutputting NMEA s
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
658
Ppagpagpan
pari
part
pas
tion Management software
n formn form (Custom option)peration Guide CDperation Guide CD
plitter cableablesplitter cable
le
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
e downe upning
Chart screenMap screen
tydefinitionsetting
numbersBeacon-on-a-Belt receiver equipment listexternal antenna kitexternal power kitGeoExplorer 3 equipment list
swordsoverviewprotecting the configuration
pausing loggingPC-BoB ConfiguraPDOP
definitionGPS tab
PDOP maskGPS precisioGPS precisio
PgDn button on OPgUp button on Opinouts
data/power snull modem cRTCM/NMEAserial clipsupport modu
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
659
poin
poppop
troubleshootingtadata required for
ngfinitionle
) key
cablehooting
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
t featuresSee also featureaccuracychanging settings for allcollecting while recording line or area featurescollecting, how tocreating in GPS Pathfinder Office, how tohow to createlabels, specifyingminimum number of positionsnumber of positions loggedsetting GPS accuracysetting logging intervalsetting parameters for allsetting point feature parametersspecifying accuracywith date attribute
creating in GPS Pathfinder Office-up lists-up messages
position precision,postprocessing da
logging extraoverviewtroubleshooti
postprocessing, depower adaptor cabpower keypower level
overviewproblems with
Power On/Off (opower source
leveltypes
power statuspower, external kitpower/data splitterprecision, troubles
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
660
prel
prepPrinprob
rential correction link is not
erentially correct positions wheningth GeoExplorer 3sing GPS Pathfinder Office
mber
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
ogging data techniquehow to use preloggingoverview
aring for data collectiont button on Operation Guide CDlemautomatically generated Time attributes are
incorrectcoordinates displayed by the GeoExplorer 3
appear to be incorrectGeoExplorer 3 is not displaying a GPS
positionGeoExplorer 3 is not tracking satellitesGeoExplorer 3 screen is hard to readGeoExplorer 3 will not turn on, or turns off
immediately after being turned oninternal compass does not appear to be
workingprecision of recorded GPS positions is less
than was expected
real-time diffeworking
unable to diffpostprocess
using BoB wiproject, creating uproximity alarm
Road tabturn off
pseudorandom nudefinitionof satellite
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
661
QQuiQui
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
ckStart quick reference cardt button on Operation Guide CD
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
662
Rreal
real
ReaRearebo
recereco
on Guide CDw
stemsries
sry
s
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
-timecorrected positions, receivingdifferential correction
troubleshootingdifferential GPSsettingsstatus
-time corrected positionssmoothing
l-time forml-time position iconotingcoldwarm
iver, resettingrding area/line/point features together
red text in Operatireference, overvierelease noticeremoving
coordinate sydata dictionafilters
Rename file(s) listrenaming
base data filedata dictionafilesrover files
Repeat modeRepeating feature
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
663
rese
resurighroadroadroadRoaRoa
rove
ing the connection deviceteter cable
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
ttingcoordinate systemsfactory defaultsfor upgrade of firmwareGPS receiverparameters
ming loggingt arrow (4) key
navigation screenscale, settingscreen, viewing direction
d sign info windowd tabinfo windowsoption listoverview
rantenna heightdefinition
rover data filescreatingdeletingopeningrenaming
RTCMage limitbaud ratedefinitioniconinput, specifyword error ra
RTCM/NMEA splitpinouts
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
664
Ssate
satesatesate
sate
blocking
lay of positionsed for carrier phase databeing computedits
th graphbleshooting
tices
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
llitecurrent elevationfrequencyPRNSNRstrength
llite geometryllite geometry indicatorllite iconflashingnumber below flashing
llite informationviewing graphicallyviewing textually
satellite signalslosingobstructions
satellite, bearing tosatellites
graphical dispnumber needpositions notpredicting orbsignal strengtracking, trou
savingaveraged ver
screenbacklightcontrast
screen scaleChart screen
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
665
scre s (Map tab)s (Update tab)
charts
aturesary listings list
(Chart tab)(Road tab)nn (Compass tab)n (Road tab)
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
ensAboutCalibrationChartCompassEdit configurationfactory defaultsGPS Advanced modeGPS Standard modemapoverviewresetreset receiverroad navigationSelectSelect startSelect targetStatus tab in DGPS modeStatus tab in Standard modeupgrade firmware
Search for featureSearch for featuresections
DATANAVsummary flowsummary ofSYS
segmentsegmenting line feSelect data dictionSelect feature settSelect screenSelect start optionSelect start screenSelect target formSelect target formSelect target optioSelect target screeSelect target scree
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
666
sele
seri
seriSetSetSet
parameters for selected feature
derstem
atyfeatureseaturest features
arameters for selected featureal (line and area features)al (point features)nt
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
ctingcoordinate systemdata dictionaryfeatures on map using the cursorfeatures using the cursorlayers to display on the chartlayers to display on the maptargetwaypoints using the cursor
al clipdata transferNMEA outputoverviewpart numberpinoutsRTCM input
al number, viewingall areas formall lines formall points form
settingarea featurebaud ratebearing anglebeep volumecoordinate orcoordinate sydate formatdatumdegrees formGPS accurac
for areafor line ffor poin
languageline feature plogging intervlogging intervoffset directiooffsets forma
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
667
SetushoShoShoShosignsign
sky,skypsmo
n formn form (Custom option)-noise ratio (SNR)
om GIS data formatto format suitable for GIS
IS data to
r
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
point feature parameters for selected featurescreen contrastscreen contrast (decreasing)screen contrast (increasing)time formattime zonep tab
ulder carrying pouchw attributes optionw features optionw values optional strength bar graphal-to-noise ratio (SNR)GPS tabof DGPS signalStatus tab (DGPS mode)
getting a clear viewlotothing
SNR maskGPS precisioGPS precisio
SNR see signal-tosorting featuresspecificationssplitter cablessf file format
conversion frconversion in
systemsconverting G
Standard modeGPS slider baGPS taboverviewStatus tab
start pointnoneselecting
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
668
Statstat
stat
Statstat
Stat
stopsub
t
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
ion IDus
data transferexternal connections
us baroverview
us fieldus information
viewing graphicallyviewing textually
us tabDGPS modeoverviewStandard modebits, specifying
lists
support moduledata transferNMEA outpupinoutsRTCM input
SYS (s) keySYS section
diagramGPS taboverviewSetup tabStatus tab
System fieldsystem overview
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
669
Ttabs
re as, using Compass tab, using the road screend
g cursorg the Select target option
e as
een
to create in GPS Pathfinder
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
ChartCompassFileGPSMapNewRoadSetupStatussummaryUpdate
targetclearing featunavigating tonavigating tonone selecteselectingselecting usinselecting usinsetting featur
target nameCompass scrRoad screen
taskslock iconlocking
text attributes, howOffice
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
670
text
texttime
timetimetipstractrailtran
stemsry from GPS Pathfinder Office tor 3, how toof files lefteoExplorer 3eoExplorer 3, how to
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
completionaccepting suggested textdeleting matchesdisablingenablingexplainedreset list
, entering
changing formatfeature was updatedsorting features byattributes, troubleshootingzone, setting
king satellites, troubleshootingof dots, in Chart tabsfer status
transferringcoordinate sydata dictiona
GeoExplorefiles, numberGIS data to GGIS data to Ggrid filesoverview
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
671
trou
trueTurnturn
turn
n
collectionupdate
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
bleshootingautomatically generated time attributesBeacon-on-a-Belt receivercoordinatesGeoExplorer 3 screenGPS positioninternal compassposition precisionpostprocessingreal-time differential correction linktracking satellitesturning GeoExplorer on and off
north, definitioninfo window
ing on and off the GeoExplorer 3troubleshooting
ing on the GeoExplorer 3
tutorialdata collectiodata updateoverviewpreparing forpreparing forscenario
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
672
Uuniqunit
UnitUnitUnkup aUpd
res
featuresesposition of feature
g the Map tabg the Update tab
u need to doosition updatese differential correctionsption
lorer 3 data collection system
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
ue feature numbers
altitudecoordinate system
s buttons formnown fieldrrow (1) keyate attribute option list
Update feature listdeleting featufilteringoption listoverviewsearching forsorting featurviewing GPS
Update tabupdating
attributesfeatures usinfeatures usinGPS data
updating datalist of what yonot allowing pusing real-tim
Use last 3D GPS ousing the GeoExp
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
673
UsinUTCutilit
UTMUTM
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
g the GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide, definition
iesConfiguration ManagerConnection ManagerCoordinate System ManagerData Dictionary EditorData TransferExportImportcoordinate system
, definition
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
674
Vvalu
vehvelovelo
velo
Velo
ewing
ture with
rmationes
feature in the Map window
position
’re going in on the road screengsgs informationlected data dictionary
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
esadding to an attributecopyingdeletingdisplayingentering for attributesshowing in data dictionary
icle power adaptor cablecities, loggingcitydefinitionspecifying units for
city filterturning onusing to smooth real-time positions
city info window
version number, vivertex iconvertices, averaged
abandoningbeginning fealoggingoverviewsaving
viewingalmanac infoattribute valuattributesattributes of acheck markcurrent GPScurrent PDOPdirection youfeature settinfeature settinfeatures in se
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
675
VTG
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
features on mapGIS dataGPS position of featureGPS screenheading on the road screeninformation about features, attributes, and
valuesinformation about GeoExplorer 3quality of GPS positionssatellite geometrysatellite information, textuallysatellite positions, graphicallyserial numbersignal strengthversion numbermessagedefinitionspecifying
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
676
WwarWarwarway
WG
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
m bootning distance fieldningspointbase stationbase station reference positionChart screen, displayed oncreating newcreating using cursordefinitiondeletingeditingnavigating to, using Compass tabselecting to navigate fromselecting using cursor
S-84, definition
GeoE
A S U W Y# R T V X Z
677
ZZonzoozoo
xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index
C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P
e fieldming (Chart screen)ming (Map screen)
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Legal information
Legal informationLegal informationLegal informationLegal informationCopyright and Trademarks
© 1999–2001 Trimble Navigation Limited. All rights reserved.
The Sextant logo with Trimble, GeoExplorer, and GPS Pathfinder are trademarks of Trimble NavigationLimited, registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office.
The Globe & Triangle logo, Trimble, and BoB are trademarks of Trimble Navigation Limited.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Release Notice
This is the March 2001 release (Revision A) of the GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide. It applies to version1.20 of the GeoExplorer® 3 software.
Function keys
Troubleshooting
If GPS positions are not being logged, moveaway from obstructions, wait until more satellitesare in view, or change the GPS settings toinclude more satellites.
RebootingWARNING – A cold boot will erase all data andreset all configurations to factory defaults!Warm bootIf the GeoExplorer 3 will not respond:Hold down o to turn GeoExplorer 3 off.Turn GeoExplorer 3 on again.Cold bootIf still no response repeat warm boot. At thestart-up screen, hold down E and d untilFormatting Flash Sys appears.
fe Cancel—close screen andabandon changes
fm Menu—display the Main menu
fs Lighten screen display
fd Backlight mode (On/Bright/Off)
fn Darken screen display
f1 Page up / Pan up
f5 Page down / Pan down
f2 Home / Pan left
f4 End / Pan right
©19
99–2
001
Trim
ble
Nav
igat
ion
Lim
ited.
Allr
ight
sre
serv
ed.T
heG
lobe
&Tr
iang
lelo
go,a
ndTr
imbl
e,ar
etra
dem
arks
ofTr
imbl
eN
avig
atio
nLi
mite
d.Th
eSe
xtan
tlog
ow
ithTr
imbl
e,an
dG
eoEx
plor
er3,
are
trade
mar
ksof
Trim
ble
Nav
igat
ion
Lim
ited,
regi
ster
edin
the
Uni
ted
Stat
esPa
tent
and
Trad
emar
kO
ffice
.
Status bar icons
Number of satellites in use.If number flashes—too few satellites.If satellite flashes—poor geometry.
GPS positions are real-time corrected.Flashes if RTCM signal is lost.
External antenna is connected and in use.
Some configuration settings are passwordlocked.
Memory is low.
The backlight is on.
The bright backlight is on.
Internal power level indicator. “Fills up”when charging. Flashes when power levelis low.
Code precision data logging—the numbershows how many positions have beenlogged. Flashes when GPS unavailable.
Carrier precision data logging.
Logging is paused. Press l toresume.
GPS tab
NOTE – When the skyplot is fixed to North up,calibrate the digital compass.
Satellite legendBlack boxes: Satellite used to compute GPS
positions.Clear boxes: Satellite tracked but not used.No boxes: Satellite available but not tracked.A Signal strength: Satellites with signalstrengths below the configured SNR mask arenot used.B Skyplot: Outer circle shows the horizon. Innercircle shows the configured elevation mask.Satellites below the elevation mask are not used.C Satellite geometry: GPS quality depends onthe geometry (PDOP) of the satellites. If thequality falls below the cutoff level then GPSpositions will not be computed.D Current position: Displays the current GPSposition.
A
B
D
C
FFFF
GeoExplorer 3 QuickStart
Part Number 38598-00-ENG, Rev B
Keys
CLOSE Close the current screen(and save changes)
ENTER Select highlighted itemOPTION Display more functionsSYS Go to / cycle SYS tabsDATA Go to / cycle DATA tabsNAV Go to / cycle NAV tabsFn Use second key function (blue)
(see Function keys)LOG Pause/Resume loggingo Power On/Off
CLOSE
CANCEL MENU
OPTION
ENTER
LOG
Fn
SYS NAV
DATA
Moving around the system Section / Tab layout
Tabs
SYS DATA NAV
Sections
s d nPress these keys to move betweensections. Multiple presses move to
the next tab in that section.
mPress this key to access all functions
for the current screen.
f + mPress this key combination to display
the Main menu, an overview of allsections and tabs.
Accessing options
Main menu
sGPS tab SETUP tabSTATUS tab
Configuration Datadictionary
Featuresettings
ResetAbout
DataGPS
Real-timeCoordinates
Units COMMSOther
Logginginterval
Accuracy Minimumpositions/Offset
Formats
NEW tab MAP tabUPDATE tab
FILE tab
dDelete fileBase station
UPDATE tab
ROAD tab CHART tabCOMPASS tab
n
Waypoints Waypoints Waypoints